Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in doc
      1 \input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
      2 @c  Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3 @c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
      4 @c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
      5 @c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
      6 @c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
      7 @c         in config/tc-*.c
      8 @c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
      9 @c         in config/obj-*.c
     10 @c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
     11 @c %**start of header
     12 @setfilename as.info
     13 @c ---config---
     14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
     15 @code{\body\}
     16 @end macro
     17 @c defaults, config file may override:
     18 @set have-stabs
     19 @c ---
     20 @c man begin NAME
     21 @c ---
     22 @include asconfig.texi
     23 @include bfdver.texi
     24 @c ---
     25 @c man end
     26 @c ---
     27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
     28 @ifset COFF
     29 @set COFF-ELF
     30 @end ifset
     31 @ifset ELF
     32 @set COFF-ELF
     33 @end ifset
     34 @ifset AOUT
     35 @set aout-bout
     36 @end ifset
     37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
     38 @set ARM
     39 @end ifset
     40 @ifset Blackfin
     41 @set Blackfin
     42 @end ifset
     43 @ifset BOUT
     44 @set aout-bout
     45 @end ifset
     46 @ifset H8/300
     47 @set H8
     48 @end ifset
     49 @ifset SH
     50 @set H8
     51 @end ifset
     52 @ifset HPPA
     53 @set abnormal-separator
     54 @end ifset
     55 @c ------------
     56 @ifset GENERIC
     57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
     58 @end ifset
     59 @ifclear GENERIC
     60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
     61 @end ifclear
     62 @setchapternewpage odd
     63 @c %**end of header
     64 
     65 @c @smallbook
     66 @c @set SMALL
     67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
     68 @c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
     69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
     70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
     71 @c
     72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
     73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
     74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
     75 @c break.
     76 @c
     77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
     78 @c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
     79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
     80 @c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
     81 @c discretion, of course.
     82 @ifinfo
     83 @set SMALL
     84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
     85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
     86 @end ifinfo
     87 
     88 @ifnottex
     89 @dircategory Software development
     90 @direntry
     91 * As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
     92 * Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
     93 @end direntry
     94 @end ifnottex
     95 
     96 @finalout
     97 @syncodeindex ky cp
     98 
     99 @copying
    100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
    101 
    102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
    103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
    104 
    105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
    106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
    107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
    108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
    109 Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
    110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
    111 
    112 @c man end
    113 @end copying
    114 
    115 @titlepage
    116 @title Using @value{AS}
    117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
    118 @ifclear GENERIC
    119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
    120 @end ifclear
    121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
    122 @sp 1
    123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
    124 @end ifset
    125 @sp 1
    126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
    127 @sp 1
    128 @sp 13
    129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
    130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
    131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
    132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
    133 distracting the boss while they got some work
    134 done.
    135 @sp 3
    136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
    137 @page
    138 @tex
    139 {\parskip=0pt
    140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
    141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
    142 }
    143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
    144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
    145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
    146      \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
    147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
    148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
    149 @end tex
    150 
    151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
    152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
    153 
    154       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
    155       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
    156       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
    157       with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
    158       Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
    159       section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
    160 
    161 @end titlepage
    162 @contents
    163 
    164 @ifnottex
    165 @node Top
    166 @top Using @value{AS}
    167 
    168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
    169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
    170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
    171 @end ifset
    172 version @value{VERSION}.
    173 @ifclear GENERIC
    174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
    175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
    176 @end ifclear
    177 
    178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
    179 Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
    180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
    181 
    182 @menu
    183 * Overview::                    Overview
    184 * Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
    185 * Syntax::                      Syntax
    186 * Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
    187 * Symbols::                     Symbols
    188 * Expressions::                 Expressions
    189 * Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
    190 @ifset ELF
    191 * Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
    192 @end ifset
    193 * Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
    194 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
    195 * Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
    196 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
    197 * AS Index::                    AS Index
    198 @end menu
    199 @end ifnottex
    200 
    201 @node Overview
    202 @chapter Overview
    203 @iftex
    204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
    205 @ifclear GENERIC
    206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
    207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
    208 @end ifclear
    209 @end iftex
    210 
    211 @cindex invocation summary
    212 @cindex option summary
    213 @cindex summary of options
    214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
    215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
    216 
    217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
    218 
    219 @ignore
    220 @c man begin SEEALSO
    221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
    222 @c man end
    223 @end ignore
    224 
    225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
    226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
    227 @smallexample
    228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
    229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
    230  [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
    231  [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
    232  [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
    233  [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
    234  [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
    235  [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
    236  [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
    237  [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
    238  [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
    239  [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
    240  [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
    241  [@b{--statistics}]
    242  [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
    243  [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
    244  [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
    245  [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
    246  [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
    247  [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
    248  [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
    249 @c
    250 @c man end
    251 @c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
    252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
    253 @c man begin TARGET
    254 @ifset AARCH64
    255 
    256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
    257    [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
    258    [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
    259 @end ifset
    260 @ifset ALPHA
    261 
    262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
    263    [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
    264    [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
    265    [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
    266    [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
    267    [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
    268 @end ifset
    269 @ifset ARC
    270 
    271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
    272    [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
    273    [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
    274    [@b{-mcode-density}]
    275    [@b{-mrelax}]
    276    [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
    277 @end ifset
    278 @ifset ARM
    279 
    280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
    281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
    282    [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
    283    [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
    284    [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
    285    [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
    286    [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
    287    [@b{-mthumb}]
    288    [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
    289    [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
    290     @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
    291    [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
    292 @end ifset
    293 @ifset Blackfin
    294 
    295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
    296    [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
    297    [@b{-mfdpic}]
    298    [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
    299    [@b{-mnopic}]
    300 @end ifset
    301 @ifset CRIS
    302 
    303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
    304    [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
    305    [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
    306    [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
    307    [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
    308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
    309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
    310 @end ifset
    311 @ifset D10V
    312 
    313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
    314    [@b{-O}]
    315 @end ifset
    316 @ifset D30V
    317 
    318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
    319    [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
    320 @end ifset
    321 @ifset EPIPHANY
    322 
    323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
    324    [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
    325 @end ifset
    326 @ifset H8
    327 
    328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
    329    [-h-tick-hex]
    330 @end ifset
    331 @ifset HPPA
    332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
    333 @end ifset
    334 @ifset I80386
    335 
    336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
    337    [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
    338    [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
    339 @end ifset
    340 @ifset I960
    341 
    342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
    343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
    344    [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
    345     @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
    346    [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
    347 @end ifset
    348 @ifset IA64
    349 
    350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
    351    [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
    352    [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
    353    [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
    354    [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
    355    [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
    356    [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
    357    [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
    358 @end ifset
    359 @ifset IP2K
    360 
    361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
    362    [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
    363 @end ifset
    364 @ifset M32C
    365 
    366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
    367    [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
    368 @end ifset
    369 @ifset M32R
    370 
    371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
    372    [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
    373    @b{--W[n]p}]
    374 @end ifset
    375 @ifset M680X0
    376 
    377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
    378    [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
    379 @end ifset
    380 @ifset M68HC11
    381 
    382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
    383    [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
    384    [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
    385    [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
    386    [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
    387    [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
    388    [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
    389 @end ifset
    390 @ifset MCORE
    391 
    392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
    393    [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
    394    [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
    395 @end ifset
    396 @ifset METAG
    397 
    398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
    399    [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
    400 @end ifset
    401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
    402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
    403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
    404 @end ifset
    405 @ifset MIPS
    406 
    407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
    408    [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
    409    [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
    410    [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
    411    [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
    412    [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
    413    [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
    414    [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
    415    [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
    416    [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
    417    [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
    418    [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
    419    [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
    420    [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
    421    [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
    422    [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
    423    [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
    424    [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
    425    [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
    426    [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
    427    [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
    428    [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
    429    [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
    430    [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
    431    [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
    432    [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
    433    [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
    434    [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
    435    [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
    436    [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
    437    [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
    438    [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
    439    [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
    440 @end ifset
    441 @ifset MMIX
    442 
    443 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
    444    [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
    445    [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
    446    [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
    447    [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
    448 @end ifset
    449 @ifset NIOSII
    450 
    451 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
    452    [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
    453    [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
    454 @end ifset
    455 @ifset NDS32
    456 
    457 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
    458     [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
    459     [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
    460     [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}]  [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
    461     [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
    462     [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
    463     [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
    464     [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
    465     [@b{-mb2bb}]
    466 @end ifset
    467 @ifset PDP11
    468 
    469 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
    470    [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
    471    [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
    472    [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
    473 @end ifset
    474 @ifset PJ
    475 
    476 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
    477    [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
    478 @end ifset
    479 @ifset PPC
    480 
    481 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
    482    [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
    483    [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
    484     @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
    485     @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
    486     @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
    487     @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
    488     @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
    489    [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
    490    [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
    491    [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
    492    [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
    493    [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
    494    [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
    495 @end ifset
    496 @ifset RL78
    497 
    498 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
    499    [@b{-mg10}]
    500    [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
    501 @end ifset
    502 @ifset RX
    503 
    504 @emph{Target RX options:}
    505    [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
    506    [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
    507    [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
    508    [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
    509    [@b{-mpid}]
    510    [@b{-mrelax}]
    511    [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
    512    [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
    513 @end ifset
    514 @ifset S390
    515 
    516 @emph{Target s390 options:}
    517    [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
    518    [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
    519    [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
    520 @end ifset
    521 @ifset SCORE
    522 
    523 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
    524    [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
    525    [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
    526    [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
    527    [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
    528 @end ifset
    529 @ifset SPARC
    530 
    531 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
    532 @c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
    533    [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
    534     @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
    535    [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
    536    [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
    537 @end ifset
    538 @ifset TIC54X
    539 
    540 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
    541  [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
    542  [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
    543 @end ifset
    544 @ifset TIC6X
    545 
    546 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
    547    [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
    548    [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
    549    [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
    550 @end ifset
    551 @ifset TILEGX
    552 
    553 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
    554    [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
    555 @end ifset
    556 @ifset TILEPRO
    557 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
    558 @end ifset
    559 @ifset VISIUM
    560 
    561 @emph{Target Visium options:}
    562    [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
    563 @end ifset
    564 @ifset XTENSA
    565 
    566 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
    567  [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
    568  [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
    569  [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
    570  [@b{--[no-]transform}]
    571  [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
    572  [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
    573 @end ifset
    574 @ifset Z80
    575 
    576 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
    577   [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
    578   [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
    579   [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
    580   [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
    581   [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
    582   [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
    583   [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
    584 @end ifset
    585 @ifset Z8000
    586 
    587 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
    588 @end ifset
    589 
    590 @c man end
    591 @end smallexample
    592 
    593 @c man begin OPTIONS
    594 
    595 @table @gcctabopt
    596 @include at-file.texi
    597 
    598 @item -a[cdghlmns]
    599 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
    600 
    601 @table @gcctabopt
    602 @item -ac
    603 omit false conditionals
    604 
    605 @item -ad
    606 omit debugging directives
    607 
    608 @item -ag
    609 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
    610 
    611 @item -ah
    612 include high-level source
    613 
    614 @item -al
    615 include assembly
    616 
    617 @item -am
    618 include macro expansions
    619 
    620 @item -an
    621 omit forms processing
    622 
    623 @item -as
    624 include symbols
    625 
    626 @item =file
    627 set the name of the listing file
    628 @end table
    629 
    630 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
    631 listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
    632 the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
    633 
    634 @item --alternate
    635 Begin in alternate macro mode.
    636 @ifclear man
    637 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
    638 @end ifclear
    639 
    640 @item --compress-debug-sections
    641 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
    642 ELF ABI.  The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
    643 linkers and object file utilities.  Note if compression would make a
    644 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
    645 
    646 @ifset ELF
    647 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
    648 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
    649 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
    650 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
    651 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
    652 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
    653 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
    654 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
    655 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
    656 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
    657 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
    658 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
    659 sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed to begin with
    660 @samp{.zdebug}.  Note if compression would make a given section
    661 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
    662 
    663 @end ifset
    664 
    665 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
    666 Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is usually the default for all
    667 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
    668 override this.
    669 
    670 @item -D
    671 Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
    672 other assemblers.
    673 
    674 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
    675 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
    676 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
    677 
    678 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
    679 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
    680 @var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
    681 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
    682 value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
    683 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
    684 
    685 @item -f
    686 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
    687 compiler output).
    688 
    689 @item -g
    690 @itemx --gen-debug
    691 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
    692 debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
    693 ECOFF or DWARF2.
    694 
    695 @item --gstabs
    696 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
    697 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
    698 
    699 @item --gstabs+
    700 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
    701 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
    702 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
    703 may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
    704 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
    705 
    706 @item --gdwarf-2
    707 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
    708 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
    709 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
    710 
    711 @item --gdwarf-sections
    712 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
    713 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
    714 corresponding code section.  For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
    715 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
    716 @var{.debug_line.text.func}.  If the code section is just called @var{.text}
    717 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
    718 suffix.
    719 
    720 @ifset ELF
    721 @item --size-check=error
    722 @itemx --size-check=warning
    723 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
    724 
    725 @item --elf-stt-common=no
    726 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
    727 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
    728 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type.  The default can be controlled
    729 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
    730 @end ifset
    731 
    732 @item --help
    733 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
    734 
    735 @item --target-help
    736 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
    737 
    738 @item -I @var{dir}
    739 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
    740 
    741 @item -J
    742 Don't warn about signed overflow.
    743 
    744 @item -K
    745 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
    746 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
    747 @end ifclear
    748 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
    749 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
    750 @end ifset
    751 
    752 @item -L
    753 @itemx --keep-locals
    754 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
    755 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
    756 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
    757 @ifclear man
    758 @xref{Symbol Names}.
    759 @end ifclear
    760 
    761 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
    762 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
    763 listing to @var{number}.
    764 
    765 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
    766 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
    767 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
    768 
    769 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
    770 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
    771 @var{number} bytes.
    772 
    773 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
    774 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
    775 to @var{number} + 1.
    776 
    777 @item --no-pad-sections
    778 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
    779 of that section.  The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
    780 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
    781 
    782 @item -o @var{objfile}
    783 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
    784 
    785 @item -R
    786 Fold the data section into the text section.
    787 
    788 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
    789 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
    790 @var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
    791 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
    792 memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
    793 requirements at the expense of speed.
    794 
    795 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
    796 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
    797 assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
    798 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
    799 
    800 @ifset ELF
    801 @item --sectname-subst
    802 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
    803 @ifclear man
    804 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
    805 @end ifclear
    806 @end ifset
    807 
    808 @item --statistics
    809 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
    810 assembly.
    811 
    812 @item --strip-local-absolute
    813 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
    814 
    815 @item -v
    816 @itemx -version
    817 Print the @command{as} version.
    818 
    819 @item --version
    820 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
    821 
    822 @item -W
    823 @itemx --no-warn
    824 Suppress warning messages.
    825 
    826 @item --fatal-warnings
    827 Treat warnings as errors.
    828 
    829 @item --warn
    830 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
    831 
    832 @item -w
    833 Ignored.
    834 
    835 @item -x
    836 Ignored.
    837 
    838 @item -Z
    839 Generate an object file even after errors.
    840 
    841 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
    842 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
    843 
    844 @end table
    845 @c man end
    846 
    847 @ifset AARCH64
    848 
    849 @ifclear man
    850 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
    851 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
    852 @end ifclear
    853 
    854 @ifset man
    855 @c man begin OPTIONS
    856 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
    857 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
    858 @c man end
    859 @c man begin INCLUDE
    860 @include c-aarch64.texi
    861 @c ended inside the included file
    862 @end ifset
    863 
    864 @end ifset
    865 
    866 @ifset ALPHA
    867 
    868 @ifclear man
    869 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
    870 for an Alpha processor.
    871 @end ifclear
    872 
    873 @ifset man
    874 @c man begin OPTIONS
    875 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
    876 processor.
    877 @c man end
    878 @c man begin INCLUDE
    879 @include c-alpha.texi
    880 @c ended inside the included file
    881 @end ifset
    882 
    883 @end ifset
    884 
    885 @c man begin OPTIONS
    886 @ifset ARC
    887 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
    888 processor.
    889 
    890 @table @gcctabopt
    891 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
    892 This option selects the core processor variant.
    893 @item -EB | -EL
    894 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
    895 @item -mcode-density
    896 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
    897 @end table
    898 @end ifset
    899 
    900 @ifset ARM
    901 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
    902 processor family.
    903 
    904 @table @gcctabopt
    905 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
    906 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
    907 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
    908 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
    909 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
    910 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
    911 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
    912 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
    913 @item -mthumb
    914 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
    915 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
    916 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
    917 @item -EB | -EL
    918 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
    919 @item -mthumb-interwork
    920 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
    921 ARM code in mind.
    922 @item -mccs
    923 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
    924 @item -k
    925 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
    926 @end table
    927 @end ifset
    928 @c man end
    929 
    930 @ifset Blackfin
    931 
    932 @ifclear man
    933 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
    934 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
    935 @end ifclear
    936 
    937 @ifset man
    938 @c man begin OPTIONS
    939 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
    940 the Blackfin processor family.
    941 @c man end
    942 @c man begin INCLUDE
    943 @include c-bfin.texi
    944 @c ended inside the included file
    945 @end ifset
    946 
    947 @end ifset
    948 
    949 @c man begin OPTIONS
    950 @ifset CRIS
    951 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
    952 @end ifset
    953 
    954 @ifset D10V
    955 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
    956 a D10V processor.
    957 @table @gcctabopt
    958 @cindex D10V optimization
    959 @cindex optimization, D10V
    960 @item -O
    961 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
    962 @end table
    963 @end ifset
    964 
    965 @ifset D30V
    966 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
    967 processor.
    968 @table @gcctabopt
    969 @cindex D30V optimization
    970 @cindex optimization, D30V
    971 @item -O
    972 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
    973 
    974 @cindex D30V nops
    975 @item -n
    976 Warn when nops are generated.
    977 
    978 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
    979 @item -N
    980 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
    981 @end table
    982 @end ifset
    983 @c man end
    984 
    985 @ifset EPIPHANY
    986 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
    987 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
    988 
    989 @ifclear man
    990 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
    991 configured for an Epiphany processor.
    992 @end ifclear
    993 
    994 @ifset man
    995 @c man begin OPTIONS
    996 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
    997 an Epiphany processor.
    998 @c man end
    999 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1000 @include c-epiphany.texi
   1001 @c ended inside the included file
   1002 @end ifset
   1003 
   1004 @end ifset
   1005 
   1006 @ifset H8300
   1007 
   1008 @ifclear man
   1009 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1010 for an H8/300 processor.
   1011 @end ifclear
   1012 
   1013 @ifset man
   1014 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1015 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
   1016 processor.
   1017 @c man end
   1018 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1019 @include c-h8300.texi
   1020 @c ended inside the included file
   1021 @end ifset
   1022 
   1023 @end ifset
   1024 
   1025 @ifset I80386
   1026 
   1027 @ifclear man
   1028 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
   1029 configured for an i386 processor.
   1030 @end ifclear
   1031 
   1032 @ifset man
   1033 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1034 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
   1035 an i386 processor.
   1036 @c man end
   1037 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1038 @include c-i386.texi
   1039 @c ended inside the included file
   1040 @end ifset
   1041 
   1042 @end ifset
   1043 
   1044 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1045 @ifset I960
   1046 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
   1047 Intel 80960 processor.
   1048 
   1049 @table @gcctabopt
   1050 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
   1051 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
   1052 
   1053 @item -b
   1054 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
   1055 
   1056 @item -no-relax
   1057 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
   1058 error if necessary.
   1059 
   1060 @end table
   1061 @end ifset
   1062 
   1063 @ifset IP2K
   1064 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
   1065 Ubicom IP2K series.
   1066 
   1067 @table @gcctabopt
   1068 
   1069 @item -mip2022ext
   1070 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
   1071 
   1072 @item -mip2022
   1073 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
   1074 just the basic IP2022 ones.
   1075 
   1076 @end table
   1077 @end ifset
   1078 
   1079 @ifset M32C
   1080 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
   1081 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
   1082 
   1083 @table @gcctabopt
   1084 
   1085 @item -m32c
   1086 Assemble M32C instructions.
   1087 
   1088 @item -m16c
   1089 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
   1090 
   1091 @item -relax
   1092 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
   1093 
   1094 @item -h-tick-hex
   1095 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
   1096 
   1097 @end table
   1098 @end ifset
   1099 
   1100 @ifset M32R
   1101 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
   1102 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
   1103 
   1104 @table @gcctabopt
   1105 
   1106 @item --m32rx
   1107 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
   1108 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
   1109 
   1110 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
   1111 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
   1112 encountered.
   1113 
   1114 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
   1115 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
   1116 encountered.
   1117 
   1118 @end table
   1119 @end ifset
   1120 
   1121 @ifset M680X0
   1122 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
   1123 Motorola 68000 series.
   1124 
   1125 @table @gcctabopt
   1126 
   1127 @item -l
   1128 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
   1129 
   1130 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
   1131 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
   1132 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
   1133 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
   1134 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
   1135 
   1136 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
   1137 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
   1138 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
   1139 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
   1140 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
   1141 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
   1142 
   1143 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
   1144 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
   1145 unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
   1146 
   1147 @end table
   1148 @end ifset
   1149 
   1150 @ifset NIOSII
   1151 
   1152 @ifclear man
   1153 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1154 for an Altera Nios II processor.
   1155 @end ifclear
   1156 
   1157 @ifset man
   1158 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1159 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
   1160 Altera Nios II processor.
   1161 @c man end
   1162 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1163 @include c-nios2.texi
   1164 @c ended inside the included file
   1165 @end ifset
   1166 @end ifset
   1167 
   1168 @ifset PDP11
   1169 
   1170 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
   1171 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
   1172 
   1173 @table @gcctabopt
   1174 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
   1175 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
   1176 default is @option{-mpic}.
   1177 
   1178 @item -mall
   1179 @itemx -mall-extensions
   1180 Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
   1181 
   1182 @item -mno-extensions
   1183 Disable all instruction set extensions.
   1184 
   1185 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
   1186 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
   1187 
   1188 @item -m@var{cpu}
   1189 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
   1190 disable all other extensions.
   1191 
   1192 @item -m@var{machine}
   1193 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
   1194 model, and disable all other extensions.
   1195 @end table
   1196 
   1197 @end ifset
   1198 
   1199 @ifset PJ
   1200 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
   1201 a picoJava processor.
   1202 
   1203 @table @gcctabopt
   1204 
   1205 @cindex PJ endianness
   1206 @cindex endianness, PJ
   1207 @cindex big endian output, PJ
   1208 @item -mb
   1209 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
   1210 
   1211 @cindex little endian output, PJ
   1212 @item -ml
   1213 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
   1214 
   1215 @end table
   1216 @end ifset
   1217 
   1218 @ifset M68HC11
   1219 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
   1220 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
   1221 
   1222 @table @gcctabopt
   1223 
   1224 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
   1225 Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
   1226 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
   1227 
   1228 @item --xgate-ramoffset
   1229 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
   1230 XGATE address space.
   1231 
   1232 @item -mshort
   1233 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
   1234 
   1235 @item -mlong
   1236 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
   1237 
   1238 @item -mshort-double
   1239 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
   1240 
   1241 @item -mlong-double
   1242 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
   1243 
   1244 @item --force-long-branches
   1245 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
   1246 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
   1247 sub routine.
   1248 
   1249 @item -S | --short-branches
   1250 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
   1251 when the offset is out of range.
   1252 
   1253 @item --strict-direct-mode
   1254 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
   1255 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
   1256 
   1257 @item --print-insn-syntax
   1258 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
   1259 
   1260 @item --print-opcodes
   1261 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
   1262 
   1263 @item --generate-example
   1264 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
   1265 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
   1266 
   1267 @end table
   1268 @end ifset
   1269 
   1270 @ifset SPARC
   1271 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
   1272 for the SPARC architecture:
   1273 
   1274 @table @gcctabopt
   1275 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
   1276 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
   1277 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
   1278 
   1279 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
   1280 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
   1281 
   1282 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
   1283 UltraSPARC extensions.
   1284 
   1285 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
   1286 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
   1287 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
   1288 
   1289 @item -bump
   1290 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
   1291 @end table
   1292 @end ifset
   1293 
   1294 @ifset TIC54X
   1295 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
   1296 architecture.
   1297 
   1298 @table @gcctabopt
   1299 @item -mfar-mode
   1300 Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
   1301 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
   1302 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
   1303 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
   1304 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
   1305 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
   1306 behaviour in the shell.
   1307 @end table
   1308 @end ifset
   1309 
   1310 @ifset MIPS
   1311 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
   1312 a MIPS processor.
   1313 
   1314 @table @gcctabopt
   1315 @item -G @var{num}
   1316 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
   1317 implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
   1318 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
   1319 
   1320 @cindex MIPS endianness
   1321 @cindex endianness, MIPS
   1322 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
   1323 @item -EB
   1324 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
   1325 
   1326 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
   1327 @item -EL
   1328 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
   1329 
   1330 @cindex MIPS ISA
   1331 @item -mips1
   1332 @itemx -mips2
   1333 @itemx -mips3
   1334 @itemx -mips4
   1335 @itemx -mips5
   1336 @itemx -mips32
   1337 @itemx -mips32r2
   1338 @itemx -mips32r3
   1339 @itemx -mips32r5
   1340 @itemx -mips32r6
   1341 @itemx -mips64
   1342 @itemx -mips64r2
   1343 @itemx -mips64r3
   1344 @itemx -mips64r5
   1345 @itemx -mips64r6
   1346 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
   1347 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
   1348 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
   1349 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
   1350 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
   1351 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
   1352 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
   1353 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
   1354 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
   1355 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
   1356 
   1357 @item -march=@var{cpu}
   1358 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
   1359 
   1360 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
   1361 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
   1362 
   1363 @item -mfix7000
   1364 @itemx -mno-fix7000
   1365 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
   1366 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
   1367 
   1368 @item -mfix-rm7000
   1369 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
   1370 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
   1371 followed by a load instruction.
   1372 
   1373 @item -mdebug
   1374 @itemx -no-mdebug
   1375 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
   1376 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
   1377 
   1378 @item -mpdr
   1379 @itemx -mno-pdr
   1380 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
   1381 
   1382 @item -mgp32
   1383 @itemx -mfp32
   1384 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
   1385 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
   1386 all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
   1387 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
   1388 
   1389 @item -mgp64
   1390 @itemx -mfp64
   1391 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
   1392 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
   1393 all times.  @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
   1394 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
   1395 
   1396 @item -mfpxx
   1397 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
   1398 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
   1399 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
   1400 32 or 64 bits wide.
   1401 
   1402 @item -modd-spreg
   1403 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
   1404 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
   1405 registers when supported by the ISA.  @samp{-mfpxx} implies
   1406 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
   1407 
   1408 @item -mips16
   1409 @itemx -no-mips16
   1410 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
   1411 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
   1412 turns off this option.
   1413 
   1414 @item -mmicromips
   1415 @itemx -mno-micromips
   1416 Generate code for the microMIPS processor.  This is equivalent to putting
   1417 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-micromips}
   1418 turns off this option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
   1419 at the start of the assembly file.
   1420 
   1421 @item -msmartmips
   1422 @itemx -mno-smartmips
   1423 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
   1424 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
   1425 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
   1426 
   1427 @item -mips3d
   1428 @itemx -no-mips3d
   1429 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
   1430 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
   1431 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
   1432 
   1433 @item -mdmx
   1434 @itemx -no-mdmx
   1435 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
   1436 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
   1437 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
   1438 
   1439 @item -mdsp
   1440 @itemx -mno-dsp
   1441 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
   1442 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
   1443 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
   1444 
   1445 @item -mdspr2
   1446 @itemx -mno-dspr2
   1447 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
   1448 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
   1449 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
   1450 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
   1451 
   1452 @item -mdspr3
   1453 @itemx -mno-dspr3
   1454 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
   1455 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
   1456 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
   1457 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
   1458 
   1459 @item -mmsa
   1460 @itemx -mno-msa
   1461 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
   1462 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
   1463 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
   1464 
   1465 @item -mxpa
   1466 @itemx -mno-xpa
   1467 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
   1468 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
   1469 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
   1470 
   1471 @item -mmt
   1472 @itemx -mno-mt
   1473 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
   1474 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
   1475 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
   1476 
   1477 @item -mmcu
   1478 @itemx -mno-mcu
   1479 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
   1480 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
   1481 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
   1482 
   1483 @item -minsn32
   1484 @itemx -mno-insn32
   1485 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
   1486 microMIPS processor.  This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
   1487 instructions.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
   1488 the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
   1489 option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
   1490 start of the assembly file.  By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
   1491 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
   1492 
   1493 @item --construct-floats
   1494 @itemx --no-construct-floats
   1495 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
   1496 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
   1497 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
   1498 the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
   1499 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
   1500 
   1501 @item --relax-branch
   1502 @itemx --no-relax-branch
   1503 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
   1504 branches.  By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
   1505 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
   1506 
   1507 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
   1508 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
   1509 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format.  The latter is the default.
   1510 
   1511 @cindex emulation
   1512 @item --emulation=@var{name}
   1513 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
   1514 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both.  MIPS ECOFF support was
   1515 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
   1516 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
   1517 
   1518 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
   1519 @samp{mipsbelf}.  Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
   1520 is always ELF.  @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
   1521 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
   1522 preferred options instead.
   1523 
   1524 @item -nocpp
   1525 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
   1526 the native tools.
   1527 
   1528 @item --trap
   1529 @itemx --no-trap
   1530 @itemx --break
   1531 @itemx --no-break
   1532 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
   1533 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
   1534 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
   1535 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
   1536 break exception.
   1537 
   1538 @item -n
   1539 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
   1540 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
   1541 @end table
   1542 @end ifset
   1543 
   1544 @ifset MCORE
   1545 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
   1546 an MCore processor.
   1547 
   1548 @table @gcctabopt
   1549 @item -jsri2bsr
   1550 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
   1551 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
   1552 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
   1553 
   1554 @item -sifilter
   1555 @itemx -nosifilter
   1556 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
   1557 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
   1558 
   1559 @item -relax
   1560 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
   1561 
   1562 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
   1563 Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
   1564 can be assembled.
   1565 
   1566 @item -EB
   1567 Assemble for a big endian target.
   1568 
   1569 @item -EL
   1570 Assemble for a little endian target.
   1571 
   1572 @end table
   1573 @end ifset
   1574 @c man end
   1575 
   1576 @ifset METAG
   1577 
   1578 @ifclear man
   1579 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1580 for a Meta processor.
   1581 @end ifclear
   1582 
   1583 @ifset man
   1584 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1585 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
   1586 Meta processor.
   1587 @c man end
   1588 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1589 @include c-metag.texi
   1590 @c ended inside the included file
   1591 @end ifset
   1592 
   1593 @end ifset
   1594 
   1595 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1596 @ifset MMIX
   1597 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
   1598 @end ifset
   1599 
   1600 @ifset NDS32
   1601 
   1602 @ifclear man
   1603 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1604 for a NDS32 processor.
   1605 @end ifclear
   1606 @c ended inside the included file
   1607 @end ifset
   1608 
   1609 @ifset man
   1610 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1611 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
   1612 NDS32 processor.
   1613 @c man end
   1614 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1615 @include c-nds32.texi
   1616 @c ended inside the included file
   1617 @end ifset
   1618 
   1619 @c man end
   1620 @ifset PPC
   1621 
   1622 @ifclear man
   1623 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1624 for a PowerPC processor.
   1625 @end ifclear
   1626 
   1627 @ifset man
   1628 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1629 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
   1630 PowerPC processor.
   1631 @c man end
   1632 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1633 @include c-ppc.texi
   1634 @c ended inside the included file
   1635 @end ifset
   1636 
   1637 @end ifset
   1638 
   1639 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1640 @ifset RX
   1641 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
   1642 @end ifset
   1643 
   1644 @ifset S390
   1645 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
   1646 processor family.
   1647 
   1648 @table @gcctabopt
   1649 @item -m31
   1650 @itemx -m64
   1651 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
   1652 @item -mesa
   1653 @item -mzarch
   1654 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
   1655 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
   1656 @item -march=@var{processor}
   1657 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
   1658 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
   1659 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
   1660 @item -mregnames
   1661 @itemx -mno-regnames
   1662 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
   1663 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
   1664 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
   1665 but evaluates to zero.
   1666 @end table
   1667 @end ifset
   1668 @c man end
   1669 
   1670 @ifset TIC6X
   1671 
   1672 @ifclear man
   1673 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1674 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
   1675 @end ifclear
   1676 
   1677 @ifset man
   1678 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1679 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
   1680 TMS320C6000 processor.
   1681 @c man end
   1682 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1683 @include c-tic6x.texi
   1684 @c ended inside the included file
   1685 @end ifset
   1686 
   1687 @end ifset
   1688 
   1689 @ifset TILEGX
   1690 
   1691 @ifclear man
   1692 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1693 for a TILE-Gx processor.
   1694 @end ifclear
   1695 
   1696 @ifset man
   1697 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1698 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
   1699 processor.
   1700 @c man end
   1701 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1702 @include c-tilegx.texi
   1703 @c ended inside the included file
   1704 @end ifset
   1705 
   1706 @end ifset
   1707 
   1708 @ifset VISIUM
   1709 
   1710 @ifclear man
   1711 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1712 for a Visium processor.
   1713 @end ifclear
   1714 
   1715 @ifset man
   1716 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1717 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
   1718 processor.
   1719 @c man end
   1720 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1721 @include c-visium.texi
   1722 @c ended inside the included file
   1723 @end ifset
   1724 
   1725 @end ifset
   1726 
   1727 @ifset XTENSA
   1728 
   1729 @ifclear man
   1730 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
   1731 for an Xtensa processor.
   1732 @end ifclear
   1733 
   1734 @ifset man
   1735 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1736 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
   1737 Xtensa processor.
   1738 @c man end
   1739 @c man begin INCLUDE
   1740 @include c-xtensa.texi
   1741 @c ended inside the included file
   1742 @end ifset
   1743 
   1744 @end ifset
   1745 
   1746 @c man begin OPTIONS
   1747 
   1748 @ifset Z80
   1749 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
   1750 a Z80 family processor.
   1751 @table @gcctabopt
   1752 @item -z80
   1753 Assemble for Z80 processor.
   1754 @item -r800
   1755 Assemble for R800 processor.
   1756 @item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
   1757 @itemx -Wnud
   1758 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
   1759 @item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
   1760 @itemx -Wnup
   1761 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
   1762 @item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
   1763 @itemx -Wud
   1764 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
   1765 @item  -warn-unportable-instructions
   1766 @itemx -Wup
   1767 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
   1768 @item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
   1769 @itemx -Fud
   1770 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
   1771 @item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
   1772 @itemx -Fup
   1773 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
   1774 @end table
   1775 @end ifset
   1776 
   1777 @c man end
   1778 
   1779 @menu
   1780 * Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
   1781 * GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
   1782 * Object Formats::              Object File Formats
   1783 * Command Line::                Command Line
   1784 * Input Files::                 Input Files
   1785 * Object::                      Output (Object) File
   1786 * Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
   1787 @end menu
   1788 
   1789 @node Manual
   1790 @section Structure of this Manual
   1791 
   1792 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
   1793 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
   1794 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
   1795 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
   1796 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
   1797 
   1798 @ifclear GENERIC
   1799 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
   1800 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
   1801 @end ifclear
   1802 @ifset GENERIC
   1803 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
   1804 various flavors of the assembler.
   1805 @end ifset
   1806 
   1807 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
   1808 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
   1809 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
   1810 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
   1811 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
   1812 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
   1813 particular architecture.
   1814 @ifset GENERIC
   1815 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
   1816 machine architecture manual for this information.
   1817 @end ifset
   1818 @ifclear GENERIC
   1819 @ifset H8/300
   1820 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
   1821 Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
   1822 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
   1823 @end ifset
   1824 @ifset SH
   1825 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
   1826 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
   1827 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
   1828 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
   1829 @end ifset
   1830 @ifset Z8000
   1831 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
   1832 @end ifset
   1833 @end ifclear
   1834 
   1835 @c I think this is premature---doc (a] cygnus.com, 17jan1991
   1836 @ignore
   1837 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
   1838 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
   1839 Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
   1840 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
   1841 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
   1842 qualification.
   1843 
   1844 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
   1845 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
   1846 computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
   1847 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
   1848 @end ignore
   1849 
   1850 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
   1851 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
   1852 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
   1853 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
   1854 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
   1855 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
   1856 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
   1857 @c directives).
   1858 
   1859 @node GNU Assembler
   1860 @section The GNU Assembler
   1861 
   1862 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
   1863 
   1864 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
   1865 @ifclear GENERIC
   1866 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
   1867 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
   1868 @end ifclear
   1869 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
   1870 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
   1871 architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
   1872 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
   1873 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
   1874 
   1875 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
   1876 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
   1877 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
   1878 @code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
   1879 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
   1880 machine would assemble.
   1881 @ifset VAX
   1882 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
   1883 @end ifset
   1884 @ifset M680X0
   1885 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
   1886 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
   1887 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
   1888 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
   1889 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
   1890 @end ifset
   1891 
   1892 @c man end
   1893 
   1894 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
   1895 program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
   1896 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
   1897 
   1898 @node Object Formats
   1899 @section Object File Formats
   1900 
   1901 @cindex object file format
   1902 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
   1903 object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
   1904 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
   1905 are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
   1906 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
   1907 @ifclear GENERIC
   1908 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
   1909 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
   1910 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
   1911 @end ifclear
   1912 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
   1913 @ifset I960
   1914 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
   1915 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
   1916 @end ifset
   1917 @ifset HPPA
   1918 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
   1919 SOM or ELF format object files.
   1920 @end ifset
   1921 @end ifclear
   1922 
   1923 @node Command Line
   1924 @section Command Line
   1925 
   1926 @cindex command line conventions
   1927 
   1928 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
   1929 options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
   1930 before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
   1931 significant.
   1932 
   1933 @cindex standard input, as input file
   1934 @kindex --
   1935 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
   1936 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
   1937 
   1938 @cindex options, command line
   1939 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
   1940 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
   1941 @command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
   1942 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
   1943 the letter is important.   All options are optional.
   1944 
   1945 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
   1946 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
   1947 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
   1948 standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
   1949 
   1950 @smallexample
   1951 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
   1952 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
   1953 @end smallexample
   1954 
   1955 @node Input Files
   1956 @section Input Files
   1957 
   1958 @cindex input
   1959 @cindex source program
   1960 @cindex files, input
   1961 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
   1962 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
   1963 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
   1964 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
   1965 
   1966 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
   1967 @c APL training...   doc (a] cygnus.com
   1968 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
   1969 order specified.
   1970 
   1971 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
   1972 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
   1973 program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
   1974 (The standard input is also a file.)
   1975 
   1976 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
   1977 names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
   1978 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
   1979 is taken to be an input file name.
   1980 
   1981 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
   1982 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
   1983 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
   1984 to assemble.
   1985 
   1986 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
   1987 in your command line.
   1988 
   1989 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
   1990 file.
   1991 
   1992 @c man end
   1993 
   1994 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
   1995 
   1996 @cindex input file linenumbers
   1997 @cindex line numbers, in input files
   1998 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
   1999 either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
   2000 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
   2001 ``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
   2002 
   2003 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
   2004 to @command{@value{AS}}.
   2005 
   2006 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
   2007 directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
   2008 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
   2009 is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
   2010 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
   2011 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
   2012 
   2013 @node Object
   2014 @section Output (Object) File
   2015 
   2016 @cindex object file
   2017 @cindex output file
   2018 @kindex a.out
   2019 @kindex .o
   2020 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
   2021 your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
   2022 is the object file.  Its default name is
   2023 @ifclear BOUT
   2024 @code{a.out}.
   2025 @end ifclear
   2026 @ifset BOUT
   2027 @ifset GENERIC
   2028 @code{a.out}, or
   2029 @end ifset
   2030 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
   2031 @end ifset
   2032 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
   2033 object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
   2034 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
   2035 directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
   2036 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
   2037 
   2038 @cindex linker
   2039 @kindex ld
   2040 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
   2041 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
   2042 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
   2043 information for the debugger.
   2044 
   2045 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
   2046 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
   2047 
   2048 @node Errors
   2049 @section Error and Warning Messages
   2050 
   2051 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
   2052 
   2053 @cindex error messages
   2054 @cindex warning messages
   2055 @cindex messages from assembler
   2056 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
   2057 file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
   2058 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
   2059 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
   2060 grave problem that stops the assembly.
   2061 
   2062 @c man end
   2063 
   2064 @cindex format of warning messages
   2065 Warning messages have the format
   2066 
   2067 @smallexample
   2068 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
   2069 @end smallexample
   2070 
   2071 @noindent
   2072 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
   2073 (where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If both a logical file name
   2074 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
   2075 @ifset GENERIC
   2076 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
   2077 @end ifset
   2078 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
   2079 in the current assembler source file will be used.  The message text is
   2080 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
   2081 
   2082 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
   2083 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive.  For example:
   2084 
   2085 @smallexample
   2086   .file 2 "bar.c"
   2087      error_assembler_source
   2088   .file "foo.c"
   2089   .line 30
   2090       error_c_source
   2091 @end smallexample
   2092 
   2093 produces this output:
   2094 
   2095 @smallexample
   2096   Assembler messages:
   2097   asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
   2098   foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
   2099 @end smallexample
   2100 
   2101 @cindex format of error messages
   2102 Error messages have the format
   2103 
   2104 @smallexample
   2105 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
   2106 @end smallexample
   2107 
   2108 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
   2109 messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
   2110 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
   2111 
   2112 @node Invoking
   2113 @chapter Command-Line Options
   2114 
   2115 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
   2116 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
   2117 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
   2118 for options specific
   2119 @ifclear GENERIC
   2120 to the @value{TARGET} target.
   2121 @end ifclear
   2122 @ifset GENERIC
   2123 to particular machine architectures.
   2124 @end ifset
   2125 
   2126 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
   2127 
   2128 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
   2129 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
   2130 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
   2131 by commas.  For example:
   2132 
   2133 @smallexample
   2134 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
   2135 @end smallexample
   2136 
   2137 @noindent
   2138 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
   2139 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
   2140 local symbols in the symbol table).
   2141 
   2142 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
   2143 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
   2144 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
   2145 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
   2146 assembler.)
   2147 
   2148 @c man end
   2149 
   2150 @menu
   2151 * a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
   2152 * alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
   2153 * D::             -D for compatibility
   2154 * f::             -f to work faster
   2155 * I::             -I for .include search path
   2156 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
   2157 * K::             -K for compatibility
   2158 @end ifclear
   2159 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
   2160 * K::             -K for difference tables
   2161 @end ifset
   2162 
   2163 * L::             -L to retain local symbols
   2164 * listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
   2165 * M::		  -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
   2166 * MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
   2167 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
   2168 * o::             -o to name the object file
   2169 * R::             -R to join data and text sections
   2170 * statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
   2171 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
   2172 * v::             -v to announce version
   2173 * W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
   2174 * Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
   2175 @end menu
   2176 
   2177 @node a
   2178 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
   2179 
   2180 @kindex -a
   2181 @kindex -ac
   2182 @kindex -ad
   2183 @kindex -ag
   2184 @kindex -ah
   2185 @kindex -al
   2186 @kindex -an
   2187 @kindex -as
   2188 @cindex listings, enabling
   2189 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
   2190 
   2191 These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
   2192 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
   2193 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
   2194 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
   2195 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
   2196 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
   2197 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
   2198 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
   2199 also.
   2200 
   2201 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
   2202 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
   2203 
   2204 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
   2205 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
   2206 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
   2207 omitted from the listing.
   2208 
   2209 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
   2210 listing.
   2211 
   2212 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
   2213 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
   2214 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
   2215 @code{.sbttl}.
   2216 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
   2217 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
   2218 listing-control directives have no effect.
   2219 
   2220 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
   2221 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
   2222 
   2223 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
   2224 because it
   2225 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
   2226 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
   2227 directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
   2228 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
   2229 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
   2230 
   2231 @node alternate
   2232 @section @option{--alternate}
   2233 
   2234 @kindex --alternate
   2235 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
   2236 
   2237 @node D
   2238 @section @option{-D}
   2239 
   2240 @kindex -D
   2241 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
   2242 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
   2243 @command{@value{AS}}.
   2244 
   2245 @node f
   2246 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
   2247 
   2248 @kindex -f
   2249 @cindex trusted compiler
   2250 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
   2251 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
   2252 (trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
   2253 and comment preprocessing on
   2254 the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
   2255 ,Preprocessing}.
   2256 
   2257 @quotation
   2258 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
   2259 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
   2260 not work correctly.
   2261 @end quotation
   2262 
   2263 @node I
   2264 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
   2265 
   2266 @kindex -I @var{path}
   2267 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
   2268 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
   2269 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
   2270 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
   2271 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
   2272 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
   2273 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
   2274 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
   2275 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
   2276 specified (left to right) on the command line.
   2277 
   2278 @node K
   2279 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
   2280 
   2281 @kindex -K
   2282 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
   2283 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
   2284 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
   2285 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
   2286 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
   2287 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
   2288 alteration on other platforms.
   2289 @end ifclear
   2290 
   2291 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
   2292 @cindex difference tables, warning
   2293 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
   2294 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
   2295 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
   2296 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
   2297 is done.
   2298 @end ifset
   2299 
   2300 @node L
   2301 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
   2302 
   2303 @kindex -L
   2304 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
   2305 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
   2306 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
   2307 called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
   2308 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
   2309 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
   2310 notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
   2311 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
   2312 
   2313 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
   2314 in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
   2315 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
   2316 
   2317 @node listing
   2318 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
   2319 
   2320 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
   2321 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
   2322 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
   2323 them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
   2324 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
   2325 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
   2326 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
   2327 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
   2328 
   2329 @table @gcctabopt
   2330 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
   2331 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
   2332 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
   2333 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
   2334 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
   2335 
   2336 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
   2337 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
   2338 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
   2339 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
   2340 a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
   2341 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
   2342 switch is used the default is to one.
   2343 
   2344 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
   2345 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
   2346 @cindex Width of source line output
   2347 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
   2348 alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
   2349 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
   2350 
   2351 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
   2352 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
   2353 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
   2354 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
   2355 displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
   2356 @end table
   2357 
   2358 @node M
   2359 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
   2360 
   2361 @kindex -M
   2362 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
   2363 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
   2364 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
   2365 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
   2366 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
   2367 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
   2368 information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
   2369 arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
   2370 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
   2371 
   2372 The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
   2373 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
   2374 file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
   2375 individually.  These are:
   2376 
   2377 @itemize @bullet
   2378 @item global symbols in common section
   2379 
   2380 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
   2381 Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
   2382 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
   2383 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
   2384 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
   2385 
   2386 @item complex relocations
   2387 
   2388 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
   2389 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
   2390 are not support by other object file formats.
   2391 
   2392 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
   2393 
   2394 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
   2395 This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
   2396 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
   2397 script.
   2398 
   2399 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
   2400 
   2401 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
   2402 name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
   2403 
   2404 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
   2405 
   2406 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
   2407 address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
   2408 which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
   2409 not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
   2410 assigned within a linker script.
   2411 @end itemize
   2412 
   2413 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
   2414 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
   2415 seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
   2416 
   2417 @itemize @bullet
   2418 
   2419 @item EBCDIC strings
   2420 
   2421 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
   2422 
   2423 @item packed binary coded decimal
   2424 
   2425 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
   2426 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
   2427 
   2428 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
   2429 
   2430 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2431 
   2432 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
   2433 
   2434 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2435 
   2436 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
   2437 
   2438 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
   2439 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
   2440 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
   2441 these options serve no purpose.
   2442 
   2443 @item @code{OPT} list control options
   2444 
   2445 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
   2446 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
   2447 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
   2448 
   2449 @item other @code{OPT} options
   2450 
   2451 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
   2452 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
   2453 
   2454 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
   2455 
   2456 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
   2457 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
   2458 
   2459 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
   2460 
   2461 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
   2462 
   2463 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
   2464 
   2465 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2466 
   2467 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
   2468 
   2469 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2470 
   2471 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
   2472 
   2473 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
   2474 
   2475 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
   2476 
   2477 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2478 
   2479 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
   2480 
   2481 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2482 
   2483 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
   2484 
   2485 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
   2486 
   2487 @end itemize
   2488 
   2489 @node MD
   2490 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
   2491 
   2492 @kindex --MD
   2493 @cindex dependency tracking
   2494 @cindex make rules
   2495 
   2496 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
   2497 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
   2498 dependencies of the main source file.
   2499 
   2500 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
   2501 
   2502 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
   2503 
   2504 @node no-pad-sections
   2505 @section Output Section Padding
   2506 @kindex --no-pad-sections
   2507 @cindex output section padding
   2508 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
   2509 alignment boundary.  But this can waste space, which can be significant on
   2510 memory constrained targets.  So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
   2511 disable this behaviour.
   2512 
   2513 @node o
   2514 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
   2515 
   2516 @kindex -o
   2517 @cindex naming object file
   2518 @cindex object file name
   2519 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
   2520 default it has the name
   2521 @ifset GENERIC
   2522 @ifset I960
   2523 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
   2524 @end ifset
   2525 @ifclear I960
   2526 @file{a.out}.
   2527 @end ifclear
   2528 @end ifset
   2529 @ifclear GENERIC
   2530 @ifset I960
   2531 @file{b.out}.
   2532 @end ifset
   2533 @ifclear I960
   2534 @file{a.out}.
   2535 @end ifclear
   2536 @end ifclear
   2537 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
   2538 object file a different name.
   2539 
   2540 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
   2541 existing file of the same name.
   2542 
   2543 @node R
   2544 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
   2545 
   2546 @kindex -R
   2547 @cindex data and text sections, joining
   2548 @cindex text and data sections, joining
   2549 @cindex joining text and data sections
   2550 @cindex merging text and data sections
   2551 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
   2552 data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
   2553 the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
   2554 section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
   2555 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
   2556 appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
   2557 
   2558 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
   2559 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
   2560 data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
   2561 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
   2562 
   2563 @ifset COFF-ELF
   2564 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
   2565 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
   2566 @samp{.data}.
   2567 @end ifset
   2568 
   2569 @ifset HPPA
   2570 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
   2571 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
   2572 @end ifset
   2573 
   2574 @node statistics
   2575 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
   2576 
   2577 @kindex --statistics
   2578 @cindex statistics, about assembly
   2579 @cindex time, total for assembly
   2580 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
   2581 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
   2582 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
   2583 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
   2584 seconds).
   2585 
   2586 @node traditional-format
   2587 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
   2588 
   2589 @kindex --traditional-format
   2590 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
   2591 from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
   2592 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
   2593 
   2594 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
   2595 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
   2596 
   2597 @node v
   2598 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
   2599 
   2600 @kindex -v
   2601 @kindex -version
   2602 @cindex assembler version
   2603 @cindex version of assembler
   2604 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
   2605 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
   2606 command line.
   2607 
   2608 @node W
   2609 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
   2610 
   2611 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
   2612 assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
   2613 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
   2614 made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
   2615 
   2616 @kindex -W
   2617 @kindex --no-warn
   2618 @cindex suppressing warnings
   2619 @cindex warnings, suppressing
   2620 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
   2621 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
   2622 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
   2623 are still reported.
   2624 
   2625 @kindex --fatal-warnings
   2626 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
   2627 @cindex warnings, causing error
   2628 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
   2629 files that generate warnings to be in error.
   2630 
   2631 @kindex --warn
   2632 @cindex warnings, switching on
   2633 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
   2634 causes warnings to be output as usual.
   2635 
   2636 @node Z
   2637 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
   2638 @cindex object file, after errors
   2639 @cindex errors, continuing after
   2640 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
   2641 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
   2642 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
   2643 option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
   2644 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
   2645 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
   2646 
   2647 @node Syntax
   2648 @chapter Syntax
   2649 
   2650 @cindex machine-independent syntax
   2651 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
   2652 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
   2653 source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
   2654 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
   2655 @ifclear VAX
   2656 assembler.
   2657 @end ifclear
   2658 @ifset VAX
   2659 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
   2660 @end ifset
   2661 
   2662 @menu
   2663 * Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
   2664 * Whitespace::                  Whitespace
   2665 * Comments::                    Comments
   2666 * Symbol Intro::                Symbols
   2667 * Statements::                  Statements
   2668 * Constants::                   Constants
   2669 @end menu
   2670 
   2671 @node Preprocessing
   2672 @section Preprocessing
   2673 
   2674 @cindex preprocessing
   2675 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
   2676 @itemize @bullet
   2677 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
   2678 @item
   2679 adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
   2680 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
   2681 a single space.
   2682 
   2683 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
   2684 @item
   2685 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
   2686 appropriate number of newlines.
   2687 
   2688 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
   2689 @item
   2690 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
   2691 @end itemize
   2692 
   2693 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
   2694 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
   2695 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
   2696 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
   2697 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
   2698 @samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
   2699 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
   2700 
   2701 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
   2702 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
   2703 preprocessed.
   2704 
   2705 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
   2706 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
   2707 @kindex #NO_APP
   2708 @kindex #APP
   2709 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
   2710 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
   2711 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
   2712 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
   2713 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
   2714 @code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
   2715 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
   2716 and whitespace.
   2717 
   2718 @node Whitespace
   2719 @section Whitespace
   2720 
   2721 @cindex whitespace
   2722 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
   2723 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
   2724 people to read.  Unless within character constants
   2725 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
   2726 as exactly one space.
   2727 
   2728 @node Comments
   2729 @section Comments
   2730 
   2731 @cindex comments
   2732 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
   2733 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
   2734 
   2735 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
   2736 This means you may not nest these comments.
   2737 
   2738 @smallexample
   2739 /*
   2740   The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
   2741   is to use this sort of comment.
   2742 */
   2743 
   2744 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
   2745 @end smallexample
   2746 
   2747 @cindex line comment character
   2748 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
   2749 considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
   2750 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
   2751 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
   2752 line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
   2753 comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
   2754 upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
   2755 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
   2756 
   2757 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
   2758 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
   2759 to specify logical line numbers:
   2760 
   2761 @kindex #
   2762 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
   2763 @cindex logical line numbers
   2764 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
   2765 special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
   2766 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
   2767 line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
   2768 new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
   2769 
   2770 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
   2771 the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
   2772 
   2773 @smallexample
   2774                           # This is an ordinary comment.
   2775 # 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
   2776                           # This is logical line # 36.
   2777 @end smallexample
   2778 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
   2779 of @command{@value{AS}}.
   2780 
   2781 @node Symbol Intro
   2782 @section Symbols
   2783 
   2784 @cindex characters used in symbols
   2785 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
   2786 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
   2787 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
   2788 @samp{_.$}.
   2789 @end ifclear
   2790 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
   2791 @ifclear GENERIC
   2792 @ifset H8
   2793 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
   2794 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
   2795 @samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
   2796 symbol names.)
   2797 @end ifset
   2798 @end ifclear
   2799 @end ifset
   2800 @ifset GENERIC
   2801 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
   2802 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
   2803 @end ifset
   2804 No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
   2805 There is no length limit; all characters are significant.  Multibyte characters
   2806 are supported.  Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
   2807 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
   2808 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
   2809 
   2810 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters.  In such
   2811 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character.  If a double
   2812 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
   2813 backslash @code{\} character.
   2814 @cindex length of symbols
   2815 
   2816 @node Statements
   2817 @section Statements
   2818 
   2819 @cindex statements, structure of
   2820 @cindex line separator character
   2821 @cindex statement separator character
   2822 
   2823 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
   2824 @dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
   2825 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
   2826 target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
   2827 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
   2828 preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
   2829 exception: they do not end statements.
   2830 
   2831 @cindex newline, required at file end
   2832 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
   2833 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
   2834 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
   2835 
   2836 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
   2837 
   2838 @cindex instructions and directives
   2839 @cindex directives and instructions
   2840 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
   2841 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc (a] cygnus.com,
   2842 @c 13feb91.
   2843 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
   2844 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
   2845 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
   2846 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
   2847 directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
   2848 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
   2849 assembles into a machine language instruction.
   2850 @ifset GENERIC
   2851 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
   2852 recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
   2853 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
   2854 language.@refill
   2855 @end ifset
   2856 
   2857 @cindex @code{:} (label)
   2858 @cindex label (@code{:})
   2859 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
   2860 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
   2861 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
   2862 
   2863 @ifset HPPA
   2864 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
   2865 the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
   2866 only one label may be defined on each line.
   2867 @end ifset
   2868 
   2869 @smallexample
   2870 label:     .directive    followed by something
   2871 another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
   2872            instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
   2873 @end smallexample
   2874 
   2875 @node Constants
   2876 @section Constants
   2877 
   2878 @cindex constants
   2879 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
   2880 inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
   2881 @smallexample
   2882 @group
   2883 .byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
   2884 .ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
   2885 .octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
   2886 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
   2887 95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
   2888 @end group
   2889 @end smallexample
   2890 
   2891 @menu
   2892 * Characters::                  Character Constants
   2893 * Numbers::                     Number Constants
   2894 @end menu
   2895 
   2896 @node Characters
   2897 @subsection Character Constants
   2898 
   2899 @cindex character constants
   2900 @cindex constants, character
   2901 There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
   2902 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
   2903 numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
   2904 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
   2905 used in arithmetic expressions.
   2906 
   2907 @menu
   2908 * Strings::                     Strings
   2909 * Chars::                       Characters
   2910 @end menu
   2911 
   2912 @node Strings
   2913 @subsubsection Strings
   2914 
   2915 @cindex string constants
   2916 @cindex constants, string
   2917 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
   2918 double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
   2919 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
   2920 a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
   2921 one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
   2922 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
   2923 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
   2924 escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
   2925 
   2926 @cindex escape codes, character
   2927 @cindex character escape codes
   2928 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
   2929 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
   2930 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
   2931 @c NOTE:   \initial {\\}
   2932 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
   2933 @c NOTE:   Argument of \\ has an extra }.
   2934 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
   2935 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
   2936 @table @kbd
   2937 @c      @item \a
   2938 @c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
   2939 @c
   2940 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
   2941 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
   2942 @item \b
   2943 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
   2944 
   2945 @c      @item \e
   2946 @c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
   2947 @c
   2948 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
   2949 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
   2950 @item backslash-f
   2951 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
   2952 
   2953 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
   2954 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
   2955 @item \n
   2956 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
   2957 
   2958 @c      @item \p
   2959 @c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
   2960 @c
   2961 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
   2962 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
   2963 @item \r
   2964 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
   2965 
   2966 @c      @item \s
   2967 @c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
   2968 @c      other assemblers.
   2969 @c
   2970 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
   2971 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
   2972 @item \t
   2973 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
   2974 
   2975 @c      @item \v
   2976 @c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
   2977 @c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
   2978 @c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
   2979 @c
   2980 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
   2981 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
   2982 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
   2983 An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
   2984 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
   2985 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
   2986 
   2987 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
   2988 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
   2989 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
   2990 A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
   2991 lower case @code{x} works.
   2992 
   2993 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
   2994 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
   2995 @item \\
   2996 Represents one @samp{\} character.
   2997 
   2998 @c      @item \'
   2999 @c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
   3000 @c      This is needed in single character literals
   3001 @c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
   3002 @c      a @samp{'}.
   3003 @c
   3004 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
   3005 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
   3006 @item \"
   3007 Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
   3008 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
   3009 
   3010 @item \ @var{anything-else}
   3011 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
   3012 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
   3013 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
   3014 interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
   3015 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
   3016 code and warns you of the fact.
   3017 @end table
   3018 
   3019 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
   3020 varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
   3021 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
   3022 compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
   3023 sequence.
   3024 
   3025 @node Chars
   3026 @subsubsection Characters
   3027 
   3028 @cindex single character constant
   3029 @cindex character, single
   3030 @cindex constant, single character
   3031 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
   3032 followed by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as
   3033 to strings.  So if you want to write the character backslash, you
   3034 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
   3035 @code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
   3036 grave accent.  A newline
   3037 @ifclear GENERIC
   3038 @ifclear abnormal-separator
   3039 (or semicolon @samp{;})
   3040 @end ifclear
   3041 @ifset abnormal-separator
   3042 @ifset H8
   3043 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
   3044 Renesas SH)
   3045 @end ifset
   3046 @end ifset
   3047 @end ifclear
   3048 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
   3049 and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
   3050 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
   3051 that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
   3052 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
   3053 
   3054 @node Numbers
   3055 @subsection Number Constants
   3056 
   3057 @cindex constants, number
   3058 @cindex number constants
   3059 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
   3060 are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
   3061 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
   3062 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
   3063 are floating point numbers, described below.
   3064 
   3065 @menu
   3066 * Integers::                    Integers
   3067 * Bignums::                     Bignums
   3068 * Flonums::                     Flonums
   3069 @ifclear GENERIC
   3070 @ifset I960
   3071 * Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
   3072 @end ifset
   3073 @end ifclear
   3074 @end menu
   3075 
   3076 @node Integers
   3077 @subsubsection Integers
   3078 @cindex integers
   3079 @cindex constants, integer
   3080 
   3081 @cindex binary integers
   3082 @cindex integers, binary
   3083 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
   3084 the binary digits @samp{01}.
   3085 
   3086 @cindex octal integers
   3087 @cindex integers, octal
   3088 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
   3089 digits (@samp{01234567}).
   3090 
   3091 @cindex decimal integers
   3092 @cindex integers, decimal
   3093 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
   3094 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
   3095 
   3096 @cindex hexadecimal integers
   3097 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
   3098 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
   3099 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
   3100 
   3101 Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
   3102 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
   3103 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
   3104 
   3105 @node Bignums
   3106 @subsubsection Bignums
   3107 
   3108 @cindex bignums
   3109 @cindex constants, bignum
   3110 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
   3111 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
   3112 represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
   3113 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
   3114 
   3115 @node Flonums
   3116 @subsubsection Flonums
   3117 @cindex flonums
   3118 @cindex floating point numbers
   3119 @cindex constants, floating point
   3120 
   3121 @cindex precision, floating point
   3122 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
   3123 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
   3124 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
   3125 sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
   3126 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
   3127 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
   3128 
   3129 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
   3130 @itemize @bullet
   3131 @item
   3132 The digit @samp{0}.
   3133 @ifset HPPA
   3134 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
   3135 @end ifset
   3136 
   3137 @item
   3138 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
   3139 @ifset GENERIC
   3140 @kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
   3141 @ignore
   3142 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
   3143 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
   3144 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
   3145 @end ignore
   3146 
   3147 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
   3148 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
   3149 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
   3150 
   3151 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
   3152 (in upper or lower case).
   3153 
   3154 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
   3155 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
   3156 
   3157 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
   3158 @end ifset
   3159 @ifclear GENERIC
   3160 @ifset ARC
   3161 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
   3162 @end ifset
   3163 @ifset H8
   3164 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
   3165 @end ifset
   3166 @ifset HPPA
   3167 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
   3168 @end ifset
   3169 @ifset I960
   3170 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
   3171 @end ifset
   3172 @end ifclear
   3173 
   3174 @item
   3175 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
   3176 
   3177 @item
   3178 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
   3179 
   3180 @item
   3181 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
   3182 or more decimal digits.
   3183 
   3184 @item
   3185 An optional exponent, consisting of:
   3186 
   3187 @itemize @bullet
   3188 @item
   3189 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
   3190 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
   3191 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
   3192 @item
   3193 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
   3194 @item
   3195 One or more decimal digits.
   3196 @end itemize
   3197 
   3198 @end itemize
   3199 
   3200 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
   3201 present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
   3202 
   3203 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
   3204 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
   3205 @command{@value{AS}}.
   3206 
   3207 @ifclear GENERIC
   3208 @ifset I960
   3209 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
   3210 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
   3211 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
   3212 @node Bit Fields
   3213 @subsubsection Bit Fields
   3214 
   3215 @cindex bit fields
   3216 @cindex constants, bit field
   3217 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
   3218 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
   3219 @example
   3220 @var{mask}:@var{value}
   3221 @end example
   3222 @noindent
   3223 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
   3224 @var{value}.
   3225 
   3226 The resulting number is then packed
   3227 @ifset GENERIC
   3228 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
   3229 (in host-dependent byte order)
   3230 @end ifset
   3231 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
   3232 bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
   3233 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
   3234 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
   3235 least significant digits.@refill
   3236 
   3237 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
   3238 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
   3239 @end ifset
   3240 @end ifclear
   3241 
   3242 @node Sections
   3243 @chapter Sections and Relocation
   3244 @cindex sections
   3245 @cindex relocation
   3246 
   3247 @menu
   3248 * Secs Background::             Background
   3249 * Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
   3250 * As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
   3251 * Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
   3252 * bss::                         bss Section
   3253 @end menu
   3254 
   3255 @node Secs Background
   3256 @section Background
   3257 
   3258 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
   3259 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
   3260 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
   3261 
   3262 @cindex linker, and assembler
   3263 @cindex assembler, and linker
   3264 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
   3265 combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
   3266 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
   3267 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
   3268 different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
   3269 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
   3270 sections.
   3271 
   3272 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
   3273 addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
   3274 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
   3275 within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
   3276 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
   3277 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
   3278 the proper run-time addresses.
   3279 @ifset H8
   3280 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
   3281 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
   3282 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
   3283 @end ifset
   3284 
   3285 @cindex standard assembler sections
   3286 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
   3287 of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
   3288 @dfn{bss} sections.
   3289 
   3290 @ifset COFF-ELF
   3291 @ifset GENERIC
   3292 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
   3293 @end ifset
   3294 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
   3295 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
   3296 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
   3297 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
   3298 @end ifset
   3299 
   3300 @ifset HPPA
   3301 @ifset GENERIC
   3302 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
   3303 @end ifset
   3304 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
   3305 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
   3306 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
   3307 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
   3308 assembler directives.
   3309 
   3310 @ifset SOM
   3311 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
   3312 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
   3313 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
   3314 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
   3315 @end ifset
   3316 @end ifset
   3317 
   3318 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
   3319 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
   3320 
   3321 @ifset HPPA
   3322 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
   3323 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
   3324 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
   3325 @end ifset
   3326 
   3327 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
   3328 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
   3329 object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
   3330 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
   3331 file is mentioned:
   3332 @itemize @bullet
   3333 @item
   3334 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
   3335 an address?
   3336 @item
   3337 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
   3338 @item
   3339 Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
   3340 @display
   3341 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
   3342 @end display
   3343 @item
   3344 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
   3345 @end itemize
   3346 
   3347 @cindex addresses, format of
   3348 @cindex section-relative addressing
   3349 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
   3350 @display
   3351 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
   3352 @end display
   3353 @noindent
   3354 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
   3355 nature.
   3356 @ifset SOM
   3357 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
   3358 symbol-relative instead.)
   3359 @end ifset
   3360 
   3361 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
   3362 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
   3363 
   3364 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
   3365 @dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
   3366 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
   3367 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
   3368 @code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
   3369 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
   3370 their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
   3371 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
   3372 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
   3373 
   3374 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
   3375 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
   3376 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
   3377 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
   3378 address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
   3379 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
   3380 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
   3381 
   3382 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
   3383 the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
   3384 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
   3385 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
   3386 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
   3387 data and bss sections.
   3388 
   3389 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
   3390 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
   3391 
   3392 @node Ld Sections
   3393 @section Linker Sections
   3394 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
   3395 
   3396 @table @strong
   3397 
   3398 @ifset COFF-ELF
   3399 @cindex named sections
   3400 @cindex sections, named
   3401 @item named sections
   3402 @end ifset
   3403 @ifset aout-bout
   3404 @cindex text section
   3405 @cindex data section
   3406 @itemx text section
   3407 @itemx data section
   3408 @end ifset
   3409 These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
   3410 separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
   3411 true of another.
   3412 @c @ifset aout-bout
   3413 When the program is running, however, it is
   3414 customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
   3415 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
   3416 instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
   3417 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
   3418 in the data section.
   3419 @c @end ifset
   3420 
   3421 @cindex bss section
   3422 @item bss section
   3423 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
   3424 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
   3425 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
   3426 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
   3427 bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
   3428 those explicit zeros from object files.
   3429 
   3430 @cindex absolute section
   3431 @item absolute section
   3432 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
   3433 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
   3434 not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
   3435 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
   3436 
   3437 @cindex undefined section
   3438 @item undefined section
   3439 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
   3440 the preceding sections.
   3441 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
   3442 @end table
   3443 
   3444 @cindex relocation example
   3445 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
   3446 @ifset COFF-ELF
   3447 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
   3448 @end ifset
   3449 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
   3450 
   3451 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
   3452 @ifnottex
   3453 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
   3454 @smallexample
   3455                       +-----+----+--+
   3456 partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
   3457                       +-----+----+--+
   3458 
   3459                       text   data bss
   3460                       seg.   seg. seg.
   3461 
   3462                       +---+---+---+
   3463 partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
   3464                       +---+---+---+
   3465 
   3466                       +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
   3467 linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
   3468                       +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
   3469 
   3470     addresses:        0 @dots{}
   3471 @end smallexample
   3472 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
   3473 @end ifnottex
   3474 @need 5000
   3475 @tex
   3476 \bigskip
   3477 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
   3478 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
   3479 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
   3480 
   3481 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
   3482 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
   3483 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
   3484 
   3485 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
   3486 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
   3487 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
   3488 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
   3489 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
   3490 
   3491 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
   3492 \line{0\dots\hfil}
   3493 
   3494 @end tex
   3495 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
   3496 
   3497 @node As Sections
   3498 @section Assembler Internal Sections
   3499 
   3500 @cindex internal assembler sections
   3501 @cindex sections in messages, internal
   3502 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
   3503 have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
   3504 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
   3505 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
   3506 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
   3507 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
   3508 section-relative address.
   3509 
   3510 @table @b
   3511 @cindex assembler internal logic error
   3512 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
   3513 An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
   3514 bug in the assembler.
   3515 
   3516 @cindex expr (internal section)
   3517 @item expr section
   3518 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
   3519 symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
   3520 it in the expr section.
   3521 @c FIXME item debug
   3522 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
   3523 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
   3524 @c FIXME item register
   3525 @end table
   3526 
   3527 @node Sub-Sections
   3528 @section Sub-Sections
   3529 
   3530 @cindex numbered subsections
   3531 @cindex grouping data
   3532 @ifset aout-bout
   3533 Assembled bytes
   3534 @ifset COFF-ELF
   3535 conventionally
   3536 @end ifset
   3537 fall into two sections: text and data.
   3538 @end ifset
   3539 You may have separate groups of
   3540 @ifset GENERIC
   3541 data in named sections
   3542 @end ifset
   3543 @ifclear GENERIC
   3544 @ifclear aout-bout
   3545 data in named sections
   3546 @end ifclear
   3547 @ifset aout-bout
   3548 text or data
   3549 @end ifset
   3550 @end ifclear
   3551 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
   3552 are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
   3553 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
   3554 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
   3555 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
   3556 subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
   3557 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
   3558 assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
   3559 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
   3560 constants being output.
   3561 
   3562 Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
   3563 goes in subsection number zero.
   3564 
   3565 @ifset GENERIC
   3566 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
   3567 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
   3568 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
   3569 @end ifset
   3570 @ifclear GENERIC
   3571 @ifset H8
   3572 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
   3573 boundary (two bytes).
   3574 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
   3575 @end ifset
   3576 @ifset I960
   3577 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
   3578 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
   3579 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
   3580 @c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
   3581 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
   3582 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
   3583 @end ifset
   3584 @end ifclear
   3585 
   3586 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
   3587 to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
   3588 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
   3589 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
   3590 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
   3591 data subsections as a data section.
   3592 
   3593 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
   3594 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
   3595 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
   3596 @ifset COFF
   3597 @ifset GENERIC
   3598 When generating COFF output, you
   3599 @end ifset
   3600 @ifclear GENERIC
   3601 You
   3602 @end ifclear
   3603 can also use an extra subsection
   3604 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
   3605 @var{expression}}.
   3606 @end ifset
   3607 @ifset ELF
   3608 @ifset GENERIC
   3609 When generating ELF output, you
   3610 @end ifset
   3611 @ifclear GENERIC
   3612 You
   3613 @end ifclear
   3614 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
   3615 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
   3616 @end ifset
   3617 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
   3618 (@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
   3619 is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
   3620 begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
   3621 @smallexample
   3622 .text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
   3623 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
   3624 .text 1
   3625 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
   3626 .data 0
   3627 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
   3628 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
   3629 .text 0
   3630 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
   3631 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
   3632 @end smallexample
   3633 
   3634 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
   3635 assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
   3636 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
   3637 counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
   3638 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
   3639 current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
   3640 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
   3641 
   3642 @node bss
   3643 @section bss Section
   3644 
   3645 @cindex bss section
   3646 @cindex common variable storage
   3647 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
   3648 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
   3649 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
   3650 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
   3651 section are zeroed bytes.
   3652 
   3653 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
   3654 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
   3655 
   3656 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
   3657 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
   3658 
   3659 @ifset GENERIC
   3660 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
   3661 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
   3662 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
   3663 section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
   3664 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
   3665 @end ifset
   3666 
   3667 @node Symbols
   3668 @chapter Symbols
   3669 
   3670 @cindex symbols
   3671 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
   3672 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
   3673 to debug.
   3674 
   3675 @quotation
   3676 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
   3677 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
   3678 the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
   3679 @end quotation
   3680 
   3681 @menu
   3682 * Labels::                      Labels
   3683 * Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
   3684 * Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
   3685 * Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
   3686 * Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
   3687 @end menu
   3688 
   3689 @node Labels
   3690 @section Labels
   3691 
   3692 @cindex labels
   3693 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
   3694 @samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
   3695 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
   3696 operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
   3697 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
   3698 definitions.
   3699 
   3700 @ifset HPPA
   3701 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
   3702 colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
   3703 a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
   3704 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
   3705 @end ifset
   3706 
   3707 @node Setting Symbols
   3708 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
   3709 
   3710 @cindex assigning values to symbols
   3711 @cindex symbol values, assigning
   3712 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
   3713 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
   3714 (@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
   3715 directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
   3716 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
   3717 @code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
   3718 
   3719 @ifset Blackfin
   3720 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
   3721 @end ifset
   3722 
   3723 @node Symbol Names
   3724 @section Symbol Names
   3725 
   3726 @cindex symbol names
   3727 @cindex names, symbol
   3728 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
   3729 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
   3730 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
   3731 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
   3732 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
   3733 particular target machine), and underscores.
   3734 @end ifclear
   3735 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
   3736 @ifset H8
   3737 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
   3738 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
   3739 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
   3740 on the H8/300), and underscores.
   3741 @end ifset
   3742 @end ifset
   3743 
   3744 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
   3745 than @code{Foo}.
   3746 
   3747 Symbol names do not start with a digit.  An exception to this rule is made for
   3748 Local Labels.  See below.
   3749 
   3750 Multibyte characters are supported.  To generate a symbol name containing
   3751 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
   3752 @xref{Strings}.  Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
   3753 currently supported.
   3754 
   3755 Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
   3756 refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
   3757 in a program.
   3758 
   3759 @subheading Local Symbol Names
   3760 
   3761 @cindex local symbol names
   3762 @cindex symbol names, local
   3763 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
   3764 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
   3765 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
   3766 set of local label prefixes.
   3767 @ifset HPPA
   3768 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
   3769 @end ifset
   3770 
   3771 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
   3772 normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
   3773 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
   3774 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
   3775 
   3776 @subheading Local Labels
   3777 
   3778 @cindex local labels
   3779 @cindex temporary symbol names
   3780 @cindex symbol names, temporary
   3781 Local labels are different from local symbols.  Local labels help compilers and
   3782 programmers use names temporarily.  They create symbols which are guaranteed to
   3783 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
   3784 referred to by a simple notation.  To define a local label, write a label of
   3785 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
   3786 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
   3787 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label.  To refer
   3788 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}.  The @samp{b}
   3789 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
   3790 
   3791 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
   3792 too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
   3793 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
   3794 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
   3795 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
   3796 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
   3797 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
   3798 
   3799 Here is an example:
   3800 
   3801 @smallexample
   3802 1:        branch 1f
   3803 2:        branch 1b
   3804 1:        branch 2f
   3805 2:        branch 1b
   3806 @end smallexample
   3807 
   3808 Which is the equivalent of:
   3809 
   3810 @smallexample
   3811 label_1:  branch label_3
   3812 label_2:  branch label_1
   3813 label_3:  branch label_4
   3814 label_4:  branch label_3
   3815 @end smallexample
   3816 
   3817 Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
   3818 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
   3819 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
   3820 are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
   3821 these parts:
   3822 
   3823 @table @code
   3824 @item @emph{local label prefix}
   3825 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
   3826 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
   3827 that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
   3828 used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
   3829 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
   3830 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
   3831 you may use them in debugging.
   3832 
   3833 @item @var{number}
   3834 This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
   3835 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
   3836 
   3837 @item @kbd{C-B}
   3838 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
   3839 of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
   3840 
   3841 @item @emph{ordinal number}
   3842 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
   3843 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
   3844 number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
   3845 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
   3846 @end table
   3847 
   3848 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
   3849 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
   3850 
   3851 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
   3852 @cindex dollar local symbols
   3853 
   3854 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
   3855 local labels called dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
   3856 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain
   3857 valid for only a small region of the input source code.  Normal local labels,
   3858 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
   3859 by another occurrence of the same local label.
   3860 
   3861 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
   3862 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
   3863 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
   3864 
   3865 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
   3866 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
   3867 to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
   3868 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
   3869 
   3870 @node Dot
   3871 @section The Special Dot Symbol
   3872 
   3873 @cindex dot (symbol)
   3874 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
   3875 @cindex current address
   3876 @cindex location counter
   3877 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
   3878 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
   3879 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
   3880 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
   3881 directive.
   3882 @ifclear no-space-dir
   3883 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
   3884 @samp{.space 4}.
   3885 @end ifclear
   3886 
   3887 @node Symbol Attributes
   3888 @section Symbol Attributes
   3889 
   3890 @cindex symbol attributes
   3891 @cindex attributes, symbol
   3892 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
   3893 ``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
   3894 attributes.
   3895 @ifset INTERNALS
   3896 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
   3897 @end ifset
   3898 
   3899 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
   3900 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
   3901 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
   3902 would want.
   3903 
   3904 @menu
   3905 * Symbol Value::                Value
   3906 * Symbol Type::                 Type
   3907 @ifset aout-bout
   3908 @ifset GENERIC
   3909 * a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
   3910 @end ifset
   3911 @ifclear GENERIC
   3912 @ifclear BOUT
   3913 * a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
   3914 @end ifclear
   3915 @ifset BOUT
   3916 * a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
   3917 @end ifset
   3918 @end ifclear
   3919 @end ifset
   3920 @ifset COFF
   3921 * COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
   3922 @end ifset
   3923 @ifset SOM
   3924 * SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
   3925 @end ifset
   3926 @end menu
   3927 
   3928 @node Symbol Value
   3929 @subsection Value
   3930 
   3931 @cindex value of a symbol
   3932 @cindex symbol value
   3933 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
   3934 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
   3935 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
   3936 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
   3937 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
   3938 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
   3939 called absolute.
   3940 
   3941 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
   3942 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
   3943 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
   3944 same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
   3945 name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
   3946 common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
   3947 bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
   3948 allocated storage.
   3949 
   3950 @node Symbol Type
   3951 @subsection Type
   3952 
   3953 @cindex type of a symbol
   3954 @cindex symbol type
   3955 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
   3956 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
   3957 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
   3958 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
   3959 
   3960 @ifset aout-bout
   3961 @ifclear GENERIC
   3962 @ifset BOUT
   3963 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
   3964 @c better if it were available outside examples.
   3965 @need 1000
   3966 @node a.out Symbols
   3967 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
   3968 
   3969 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
   3970 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
   3971 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
   3972 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
   3973 @code{b.out}.
   3974 
   3975 @end ifset
   3976 @ifclear BOUT
   3977 @node a.out Symbols
   3978 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
   3979 
   3980 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
   3981 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
   3982 
   3983 @end ifclear
   3984 @end ifclear
   3985 @ifset GENERIC
   3986 @node a.out Symbols
   3987 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
   3988 
   3989 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
   3990 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
   3991 
   3992 @end ifset
   3993 @menu
   3994 * Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
   3995 * Symbol Other::                Other
   3996 @end menu
   3997 
   3998 @node Symbol Desc
   3999 @subsubsection Descriptor
   4000 
   4001 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
   4002 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
   4003 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
   4004 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
   4005 @command{@value{AS}}.
   4006 
   4007 @node Symbol Other
   4008 @subsubsection Other
   4009 
   4010 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
   4011 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
   4012 @end ifset
   4013 
   4014 @ifset COFF
   4015 @node COFF Symbols
   4016 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
   4017 
   4018 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
   4019 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
   4020 
   4021 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
   4022 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
   4023 @code{.endef} directives.
   4024 
   4025 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
   4026 
   4027 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
   4028 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
   4029 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
   4030 
   4031 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
   4032 
   4033 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
   4034 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
   4035 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
   4036 table information for COFF.
   4037 @end ifset
   4038 
   4039 @ifset SOM
   4040 @node SOM Symbols
   4041 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
   4042 
   4043 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
   4044 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
   4045 
   4046 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
   4047 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
   4048 
   4049 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
   4050 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
   4051 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
   4052 @end ifset
   4053 
   4054 @node Expressions
   4055 @chapter Expressions
   4056 
   4057 @cindex expressions
   4058 @cindex addresses
   4059 @cindex numeric values
   4060 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
   4061 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
   4062 
   4063 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
   4064 a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
   4065 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
   4066 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
   4067 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
   4068 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
   4069 
   4070 @menu
   4071 * Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
   4072 * Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
   4073 @end menu
   4074 
   4075 @node Empty Exprs
   4076 @section Empty Expressions
   4077 
   4078 @cindex empty expressions
   4079 @cindex expressions, empty
   4080 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
   4081 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
   4082 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
   4083 is compatible with other assemblers.
   4084 
   4085 @node Integer Exprs
   4086 @section Integer Expressions
   4087 
   4088 @cindex integer expressions
   4089 @cindex expressions, integer
   4090 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
   4091 by @emph{operators}.
   4092 
   4093 @menu
   4094 * Arguments::                   Arguments
   4095 * Operators::                   Operators
   4096 * Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
   4097 * Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
   4098 @end menu
   4099 
   4100 @node Arguments
   4101 @subsection Arguments
   4102 
   4103 @cindex expression arguments
   4104 @cindex arguments in expressions
   4105 @cindex operands in expressions
   4106 @cindex arithmetic operands
   4107 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
   4108 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
   4109 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
   4110 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
   4111 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
   4112 instruction operands.
   4113 
   4114 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
   4115 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
   4116 or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
   4117 integer.
   4118 
   4119 Numbers are usually integers.
   4120 
   4121 A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
   4122 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
   4123 these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
   4124 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
   4125 assemblers.
   4126 
   4127 @cindex subexpressions
   4128 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
   4129 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
   4130 operator followed by an argument.
   4131 
   4132 @node Operators
   4133 @subsection Operators
   4134 
   4135 @cindex operators, in expressions
   4136 @cindex arithmetic functions
   4137 @cindex functions, in expressions
   4138 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
   4139 operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
   4140 between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
   4141 whitespace.
   4142 
   4143 @node Prefix Ops
   4144 @subsection Prefix Operator
   4145 
   4146 @cindex prefix operators
   4147 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
   4148 one argument, which must be absolute.
   4149 
   4150 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
   4151 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
   4152 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
   4153 @tex
   4154 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
   4155 @end tex
   4156 
   4157 @table @code
   4158 @item -
   4159 @dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
   4160 @item ~
   4161 @dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
   4162 @end table
   4163 
   4164 @tex
   4165 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
   4166 @end tex
   4167 
   4168 @node Infix Ops
   4169 @subsection Infix Operators
   4170 
   4171 @cindex infix operators
   4172 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
   4173 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
   4174 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
   4175 to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
   4176 absolute, and the result is absolute.
   4177 
   4178 @enumerate
   4179 @cindex operator precedence
   4180 @cindex precedence of operators
   4181 
   4182 @item
   4183 Highest Precedence
   4184 
   4185 @table @code
   4186 @item *
   4187 @dfn{Multiplication}.
   4188 
   4189 @item /
   4190 @dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
   4191 
   4192 @item %
   4193 @dfn{Remainder}.
   4194 
   4195 @item <<
   4196 @dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
   4197 
   4198 @item >>
   4199 @dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
   4200 @end table
   4201 
   4202 @item
   4203 Intermediate precedence
   4204 
   4205 @table @code
   4206 @item |
   4207 
   4208 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
   4209 
   4210 @item &
   4211 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
   4212 
   4213 @item ^
   4214 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
   4215 
   4216 @item !
   4217 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
   4218 @end table
   4219 
   4220 @item
   4221 Low Precedence
   4222 
   4223 @table @code
   4224 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
   4225 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
   4226 @cindex arguments for addition
   4227 @item +
   4228 @dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
   4229 the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
   4230 sections.
   4231 
   4232 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
   4233 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
   4234 @cindex arguments for subtraction
   4235 @item -
   4236 @dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
   4237 result has the section of the left argument.
   4238 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
   4239 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
   4240 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
   4241 
   4242 @cindex comparison expressions
   4243 @cindex expressions, comparison
   4244 @item  ==
   4245 @dfn{Is Equal To}
   4246 @item <>
   4247 @itemx !=
   4248 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
   4249 @item <
   4250 @dfn{Is Less Than}
   4251 @item >
   4252 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
   4253 @item >=
   4254 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
   4255 @item <=
   4256 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
   4257 
   4258 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
   4259 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
   4260 perform signed comparisons.
   4261 @end table
   4262 
   4263 @item Lowest Precedence
   4264 
   4265 @table @code
   4266 @item &&
   4267 @dfn{Logical And}.
   4268 
   4269 @item ||
   4270 @dfn{Logical Or}.
   4271 
   4272 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
   4273 expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
   4274 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
   4275 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
   4276 
   4277 @end table
   4278 @end enumerate
   4279 
   4280 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
   4281 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
   4282 
   4283 @node Pseudo Ops
   4284 @chapter Assembler Directives
   4285 
   4286 @cindex directives, machine independent
   4287 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
   4288 @cindex machine independent directives
   4289 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
   4290 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
   4291 in lower case.
   4292 
   4293 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
   4294 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
   4295 @ifset GENERIC
   4296 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
   4297 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
   4298 @end ifset
   4299 @ifclear GENERIC
   4300 @ifset machine-directives
   4301 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
   4302 @end ifset
   4303 @end ifclear
   4304 
   4305 @menu
   4306 * Abort::                       @code{.abort}
   4307 @ifset COFF
   4308 * ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
   4309 @end ifset
   4310 
   4311 * Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
   4312 * Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
   4313 * Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
   4314 * Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
   4315 * Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
   4316 * Bundle directives::           @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
   4317 * Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
   4318 * CFI directives::		@code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
   4319 * Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
   4320 * Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
   4321 @ifset COFF
   4322 * Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
   4323 @end ifset
   4324 @ifset aout-bout
   4325 * Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
   4326 @end ifset
   4327 @ifset COFF
   4328 * Dim::                         @code{.dim}
   4329 @end ifset
   4330 
   4331 * Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
   4332 * Eject::                       @code{.eject}
   4333 * Else::                        @code{.else}
   4334 * Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
   4335 * End::				@code{.end}
   4336 @ifset COFF
   4337 * Endef::                       @code{.endef}
   4338 @end ifset
   4339 
   4340 * Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
   4341 * Endif::                       @code{.endif}
   4342 * Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   4343 * Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   4344 * Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   4345 * Err::				@code{.err}
   4346 * Error::			@code{.error @var{string}}
   4347 * Exitm::			@code{.exitm}
   4348 * Extern::                      @code{.extern}
   4349 * Fail::			@code{.fail}
   4350 * File::                        @code{.file}
   4351 * Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
   4352 * Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
   4353 * Func::                        @code{.func}
   4354 * Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
   4355 @ifset ELF
   4356 * Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
   4357 * Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
   4358 @end ifset
   4359 
   4360 * hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
   4361 * Ident::                       @code{.ident}
   4362 * If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
   4363 * Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
   4364 * Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
   4365 * Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
   4366 @ifset ELF
   4367 * Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
   4368 @end ifset
   4369 
   4370 * Irp::				@code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
   4371 * Irpc::			@code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
   4372 * Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
   4373 * Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
   4374 @ifclear no-line-dir
   4375 * Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
   4376 @end ifclear
   4377 
   4378 * Linkonce::			@code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
   4379 * List::                        @code{.list}
   4380 * Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
   4381 * Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
   4382 * Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
   4383 @ifset ELF
   4384 * Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
   4385 @end ifset
   4386 
   4387 * Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
   4388 @ignore
   4389 * Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   4390 @end ignore
   4391 
   4392 * Macro::			@code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
   4393 * MRI::				@code{.mri @var{val}}
   4394 * Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
   4395 * Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
   4396 * Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
   4397 * Offset::			@code{.offset @var{loc}}
   4398 * Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
   4399 * P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
   4400 @ifset ELF
   4401 * PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
   4402 * Previous::                    @code{.previous}
   4403 @end ifset
   4404 
   4405 * Print::			@code{.print @var{string}}
   4406 @ifset ELF
   4407 * Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
   4408 @end ifset
   4409 
   4410 * Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
   4411 * Purgem::			@code{.purgem @var{name}}
   4412 @ifset ELF
   4413 * PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
   4414 @end ifset
   4415 
   4416 * Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
   4417 * Reloc::			@code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
   4418 * Rept::			@code{.rept @var{count}}
   4419 * Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
   4420 @ifset COFF
   4421 * Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
   4422 @end ifset
   4423 @ifset COFF-ELF
   4424 * Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
   4425 @end ifset
   4426 
   4427 * Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   4428 * Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
   4429 * Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
   4430 @ifset COFF-ELF
   4431 * Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
   4432 @end ifset
   4433 @ifclear no-space-dir
   4434 * Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
   4435 @end ifclear
   4436 
   4437 * Sleb128::			@code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
   4438 @ifclear no-space-dir
   4439 * Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
   4440 @end ifclear
   4441 @ifset have-stabs
   4442 * Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
   4443 @end ifset
   4444 
   4445 * String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
   4446 * Struct::			@code{.struct @var{expression}}
   4447 @ifset ELF
   4448 * SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
   4449 * Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
   4450 @end ifset
   4451 
   4452 @ifset COFF
   4453 * Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
   4454 @end ifset
   4455 
   4456 * Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
   4457 * Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
   4458 @ifset COFF-ELF
   4459 * Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
   4460 @end ifset
   4461 
   4462 * Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
   4463 @ifset COFF
   4464 * Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
   4465 @end ifset
   4466 
   4467 @ifset ELF
   4468 * Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
   4469 * VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
   4470 * VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
   4471 @end ifset
   4472 
   4473 * Warning::			@code{.warning @var{string}}
   4474 * Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
   4475 * Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
   4476 * Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
   4477 @ifclear no-space-dir
   4478 * Zero::                        @code{.zero @var{size}}
   4479 @end ifclear
   4480 * Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
   4481 @end menu
   4482 
   4483 @node Abort
   4484 @section @code{.abort}
   4485 
   4486 @cindex @code{abort} directive
   4487 @cindex stopping the assembly
   4488 This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
   4489 compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
   4490 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
   4491 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
   4492 quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
   4493 
   4494 @ifset COFF
   4495 @node ABORT (COFF)
   4496 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
   4497 
   4498 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
   4499 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
   4500 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
   4501 
   4502 @ifset BOUT
   4503 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
   4504 but ignores it.
   4505 @end ifset
   4506 @end ifset
   4507 
   4508 @node Align
   4509 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
   4510 
   4511 @cindex padding the location counter
   4512 @cindex @code{align} directive
   4513 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
   4514 boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
   4515 required, as described below.
   4516 
   4517 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
   4518 padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
   4519 padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
   4520 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
   4521 with no-op instructions.
   4522 
   4523 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
   4524 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
   4525 directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
   4526 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
   4527 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
   4528 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
   4529 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
   4530 
   4531 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
   4532 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
   4533 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
   4534 alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
   4535 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
   4536 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
   4537 first expression is the alignment request in words.
   4538 
   4539 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
   4540 strongarm, it is the
   4541 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
   4542 advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
   4543 counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
   4544 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
   4545 
   4546 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
   4547 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
   4548 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
   4549 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
   4550 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
   4551 
   4552 @node Altmacro
   4553 @section @code{.altmacro}
   4554 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
   4555 
   4556 @ftable @code
   4557 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
   4558 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
   4559 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
   4560 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
   4561 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
   4562 separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
   4563 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
   4564 
   4565 @item String delimiters
   4566 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
   4567 @code{"@var{string}"}:
   4568 
   4569 @table @code
   4570 @item '@var{string}'
   4571 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
   4572 
   4573 @item <@var{string}>
   4574 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
   4575 @end table
   4576 
   4577 @item single-character string escape
   4578 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
   4579 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
   4580 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
   4581 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
   4582 
   4583 @item Expression results as strings
   4584 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
   4585 and use the result as a string.
   4586 @end ftable
   4587 
   4588 @node Ascii
   4589 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
   4590 
   4591 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
   4592 @cindex string literals
   4593 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
   4594 separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
   4595 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
   4596 
   4597 @node Asciz
   4598 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
   4599 
   4600 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
   4601 @cindex zero-terminated strings
   4602 @cindex null-terminated strings
   4603 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
   4604 a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
   4605 
   4606 @node Balign
   4607 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
   4608 
   4609 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
   4610 @cindex @code{balign} directive
   4611 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
   4612 storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
   4613 alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
   4614 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
   4615 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
   4616 
   4617 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
   4618 padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
   4619 padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
   4620 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
   4621 with no-op instructions.
   4622 
   4623 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
   4624 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
   4625 directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
   4626 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
   4627 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
   4628 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
   4629 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
   4630 
   4631 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
   4632 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
   4633 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
   4634 @code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
   4635 pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
   4636 fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
   4637 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
   4638 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
   4639 the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
   4640 undefined.
   4641 
   4642 @node Bundle directives
   4643 @section Bundle directives
   4644 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
   4645 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
   4646 @cindex bundle
   4647 @cindex instruction bundle
   4648 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
   4649 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
   4650 bundle} mode.  In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
   4651 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}.  If the argument is zero, this mode is
   4652 disabled (which is the default state).  If the argument it not zero, it
   4653 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
   4654 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
   4655 
   4656 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
   4657 certain aligned boundary.  A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
   4658 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary.  For example, if
   4659 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
   4660 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle.  When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
   4661 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles.  If an
   4662 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
   4663 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
   4664 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
   4665 starts in the next bundle.  As a corollary, it's an error if any single
   4666 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
   4667 
   4668 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
   4669 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
   4670 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
   4671 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
   4672 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding.  These directives
   4673 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
   4674 aligned instruction bundle mode.  It's an error if they appear when
   4675 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
   4676 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
   4677 
   4678 @cindex bundle-locked
   4679 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
   4680 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
   4681 instructions, all within the same bundle.  A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
   4682 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
   4683 instruction sequence.  For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
   4684 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
   4685 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction.  That is, the
   4686 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
   4687 boundary.  If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
   4688 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
   4689 aligned bundle boundary.  It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
   4690 bundle size.
   4691 
   4692 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
   4693 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
   4694 nested.  That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
   4695 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
   4696 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
   4697 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
   4698 
   4699 @node Byte
   4700 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
   4701 
   4702 @cindex @code{byte} directive
   4703 @cindex integers, one byte
   4704 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
   4705 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
   4706 
   4707 @node CFI directives
   4708 @section CFI directives
   4709 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
   4710 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
   4711 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
   4712 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
   4713 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
   4714 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
   4715 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
   4716 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
   4717 
   4718 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
   4719 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
   4720 
   4721 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
   4722 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
   4723 
   4724 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
   4725 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started.  Once CFI
   4726 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
   4727 redefine it will result in an error.
   4728 
   4729 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
   4730 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
   4731 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
   4732 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
   4733 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
   4734 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
   4735 
   4736 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
   4737 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
   4738 
   4739 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
   4740 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
   4741 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
   4742 unwind entry previously opened by
   4743 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
   4744 
   4745 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
   4746 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
   4747 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
   4748 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
   4749 should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
   4750 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
   4751 a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
   4752 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
   4753 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
   4754 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
   4755 no personality routine.
   4756 
   4757 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
   4758 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
   4759 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
   4760 defined in a compact unwinding format.
   4761 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
   4762 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
   4763 
   4764 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
   4765 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
   4766 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
   4767 used for the current function.  These are emitted inline in the
   4768 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
   4769 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
   4770 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
   4771 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
   4772 
   4773 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
   4774 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
   4775 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
   4776 should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
   4777 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
   4778 or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
   4779 meaning that no LSDA is present.
   4780 
   4781 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
   4782 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
   4783 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
   4784 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
   4785 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
   4786 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
   4787 
   4788 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
   4789 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data.  The symbol
   4790 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
   4791 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used.  The LSDA data is terminated
   4792 by a section directive.
   4793 
   4794 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
   4795 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
   4796 @code{.p2align} directive.
   4797 
   4798 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
   4799 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
   4800 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
   4801 
   4802 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
   4803 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
   4804 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
   4805 remains the same.
   4806 
   4807 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
   4808 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
   4809 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
   4810 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
   4811 CFA address.
   4812 
   4813 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
   4814 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
   4815 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
   4816 
   4817 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
   4818 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
   4819 CFA.
   4820 
   4821 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
   4822 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
   4823 the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
   4824 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
   4825 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
   4826 code it's annotating.
   4827 
   4828 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
   4829 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
   4830 
   4831 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
   4832 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
   4833 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
   4834 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
   4835 
   4836 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
   4837 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
   4838 
   4839 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
   4840 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
   4841 i.e. no restoration needed.
   4842 
   4843 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
   4844 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
   4845 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
   4846 places them in the current row.  This is useful for situations where you have
   4847 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
   4848 flow of the program.  For example, we could have something like this (assuming
   4849 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
   4850 
   4851 @smallexample
   4852         je label
   4853         popq %rbx
   4854         .cfi_restore %rbx
   4855         popq %r12
   4856         .cfi_restore %r12
   4857         popq %rbp
   4858         .cfi_restore %rbp
   4859         .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
   4860         ret
   4861 label:
   4862         /* Do something else */
   4863 @end smallexample
   4864 
   4865 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
   4866 to the instructions before @code{label}.  This means we'd have to add multiple
   4867 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
   4868 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
   4869 @code{rbp}.  This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
   4870 we can write:
   4871 
   4872 @smallexample
   4873         je label
   4874         popq %rbx
   4875         .cfi_remember_state
   4876         .cfi_restore %rbx
   4877         popq %r12
   4878         .cfi_restore %r12
   4879         popq %rbp
   4880         .cfi_restore %rbp
   4881         .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
   4882         ret
   4883 label:
   4884         .cfi_restore_state
   4885         /* Do something else */
   4886 @end smallexample
   4887 
   4888 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
   4889 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
   4890 @code{.cfi} directives.
   4891 
   4892 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
   4893 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
   4894 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
   4895 
   4896 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
   4897 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
   4898 
   4899 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
   4900 SPARC register window has been saved.
   4901 
   4902 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
   4903 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
   4904 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
   4905 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
   4906 
   4907 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
   4908 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
   4909 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
   4910 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
   4911 
   4912 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
   4913 limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
   4914 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
   4915 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
   4916 or another register.
   4917 
   4918 @node Comm
   4919 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
   4920 
   4921 @cindex @code{comm} directive
   4922 @cindex symbol, common
   4923 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
   4924 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
   4925 of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
   4926 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
   4927 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
   4928 absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
   4929 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
   4930 using the largest size.
   4931 
   4932 @ifset COFF-ELF
   4933 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
   4934 an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
   4935 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
   4936 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
   4937 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
   4938 boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
   4939 power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
   4940 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
   4941 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
   4942 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
   4943 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
   4944 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
   4945 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
   4946 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
   4947 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
   4948 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
   4949 @end ifset
   4950 
   4951 @ifset HPPA
   4952 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
   4953 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
   4954 @end ifset
   4955 
   4956 @node Data
   4957 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
   4958 
   4959 @cindex @code{data} directive
   4960 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
   4961 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
   4962 absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
   4963 to zero.
   4964 
   4965 @ifset COFF
   4966 @node Def
   4967 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
   4968 
   4969 @cindex @code{def} directive
   4970 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
   4971 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
   4972 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
   4973 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
   4974 @ifset BOUT
   4975 
   4976 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
   4977 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
   4978 but ignored.
   4979 @end ifset
   4980 @end ifset
   4981 
   4982 @ifset aout-bout
   4983 @node Desc
   4984 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
   4985 
   4986 @cindex @code{desc} directive
   4987 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
   4988 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
   4989 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
   4990 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
   4991 
   4992 @ifset COFF
   4993 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
   4994 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
   4995 object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
   4996 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
   4997 @end ifset
   4998 @end ifset
   4999 
   5000 @ifset COFF
   5001 @node Dim
   5002 @section @code{.dim}
   5003 
   5004 @cindex @code{dim} directive
   5005 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
   5006 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
   5007 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
   5008 information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
   5009 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
   5010 @ifset BOUT
   5011 
   5012 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
   5013 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
   5014 ignores it.
   5015 @end ifset
   5016 @end ifset
   5017 
   5018 @node Double
   5019 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
   5020 
   5021 @cindex @code{double} directive
   5022 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
   5023 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
   5024 assembles floating point numbers.
   5025 @ifset GENERIC
   5026 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
   5027 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
   5028 @end ifset
   5029 @ifclear GENERIC
   5030 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
   5031 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
   5032 in @sc{ieee} format.
   5033 @end ifset
   5034 @end ifclear
   5035 
   5036 @node Eject
   5037 @section @code{.eject}
   5038 
   5039 @cindex @code{eject} directive
   5040 @cindex new page, in listings
   5041 @cindex page, in listings
   5042 @cindex listing control: new page
   5043 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
   5044 
   5045 @node Else
   5046 @section @code{.else}
   5047 
   5048 @cindex @code{else} directive
   5049 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
   5050 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
   5051 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
   5052 was false.
   5053 
   5054 @node Elseif
   5055 @section @code{.elseif}
   5056 
   5057 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
   5058 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
   5059 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
   5060 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
   5061 
   5062 @node End
   5063 @section @code{.end}
   5064 
   5065 @cindex @code{end} directive
   5066 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
   5067 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
   5068 
   5069 @ifset COFF
   5070 @node Endef
   5071 @section @code{.endef}
   5072 
   5073 @cindex @code{endef} directive
   5074 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
   5075 @code{.def}.
   5076 @ifset BOUT
   5077 
   5078 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
   5079 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
   5080 directive but ignores it.
   5081 @end ifset
   5082 @end ifset
   5083 
   5084 @node Endfunc
   5085 @section @code{.endfunc}
   5086 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
   5087 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
   5088 
   5089 @node Endif
   5090 @section @code{.endif}
   5091 
   5092 @cindex @code{endif} directive
   5093 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
   5094 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
   5095 conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
   5096 
   5097 @node Equ
   5098 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   5099 
   5100 @cindex @code{equ} directive
   5101 @cindex assigning values to symbols
   5102 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
   5103 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
   5104 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
   5105 
   5106 @ifset HPPA
   5107 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
   5108 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
   5109 @end ifset
   5110 
   5111 @ifset Z80
   5112 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
   5113 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
   5114 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
   5115 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
   5116 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
   5117 @end ifset
   5118 
   5119 @node Equiv
   5120 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   5121 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
   5122 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
   5123 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
   5124 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
   5125 undefined.
   5126 
   5127 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
   5128 @smallexample
   5129 .ifdef SYM
   5130 .err
   5131 .endif
   5132 .equ SYM,VAL
   5133 @end smallexample
   5134 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
   5135 
   5136 @node Eqv
   5137 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   5138 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
   5139 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
   5140 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
   5141 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
   5142 value is taken.
   5143 
   5144 @node Err
   5145 @section @code{.err}
   5146 @cindex @code{err} directive
   5147 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
   5148 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
   5149 object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
   5150 
   5151 @node Error
   5152 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
   5153 @cindex error directive
   5154 
   5155 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
   5156 string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
   5157 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
   5158 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
   5159 
   5160 @smallexample
   5161  .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
   5162 @end smallexample
   5163 
   5164 @node Exitm
   5165 @section @code{.exitm}
   5166 Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
   5167 
   5168 @node Extern
   5169 @section @code{.extern}
   5170 
   5171 @cindex @code{extern} directive
   5172 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
   5173 with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
   5174 all undefined symbols as external.
   5175 
   5176 @node Fail
   5177 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
   5178 
   5179 @cindex @code{fail} directive
   5180 Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
   5181 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
   5182 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
   5183 include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
   5184 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
   5185 
   5186 @node File
   5187 @section @code{.file}
   5188 @cindex @code{file} directive
   5189 
   5190 @ifclear no-file-dir
   5191 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
   5192 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
   5193 @code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
   5194 
   5195 @subheading Default Version
   5196 
   5197 @cindex logical file name
   5198 @cindex file name, logical
   5199 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
   5200 are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
   5201 
   5202 @smallexample
   5203 .file @var{string}
   5204 @end smallexample
   5205 
   5206 @var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
   5207 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
   5208 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
   5209 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
   5210 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
   5211 
   5212 @subheading DWARF2 Version
   5213 @end ifclear
   5214 
   5215 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
   5216 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
   5217 
   5218 @smallexample
   5219 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
   5220 @end smallexample
   5221 
   5222 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
   5223 index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
   5224 literal.
   5225 
   5226 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
   5227 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
   5228 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
   5229 entries will have.
   5230 
   5231 @node Fill
   5232 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
   5233 
   5234 @cindex @code{fill} directive
   5235 @cindex writing patterns in memory
   5236 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
   5237 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
   5238 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
   5239 may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
   5240 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
   5241 other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
   5242 is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
   5243 zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
   5244 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
   5245 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
   5246 @var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
   5247 compatible with other people's assemblers.
   5248 
   5249 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
   5250 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
   5251 assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
   5252 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
   5253 
   5254 @node Float
   5255 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
   5256 
   5257 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
   5258 @cindex @code{float} directive
   5259 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
   5260 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
   5261 @ifset GENERIC
   5262 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
   5263 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
   5264 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
   5265 @end ifset
   5266 @ifclear GENERIC
   5267 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
   5268 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
   5269 in @sc{ieee} format.
   5270 @end ifset
   5271 @end ifclear
   5272 
   5273 @node Func
   5274 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
   5275 @cindex @code{func} directive
   5276 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
   5277 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
   5278 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
   5279 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
   5280 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
   5281 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
   5282 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
   5283 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
   5284 
   5285 @node Global
   5286 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
   5287 
   5288 @cindex @code{global} directive
   5289 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
   5290 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
   5291 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
   5292 other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
   5293 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
   5294 from another file linked into the same program.
   5295 
   5296 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
   5297 compatibility with other assemblers.
   5298 
   5299 @ifset HPPA
   5300 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
   5301 partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
   5302 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
   5303 @end ifset
   5304 
   5305 @ifset ELF
   5306 @node Gnu_attribute
   5307 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
   5308 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
   5309 
   5310 @node Hidden
   5311 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
   5312 
   5313 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
   5314 @cindex visibility
   5315 This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
   5316 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
   5317 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
   5318 
   5319 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
   5320 their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
   5321 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
   5322 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
   5323 @end ifset
   5324 
   5325 @node hword
   5326 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
   5327 
   5328 @cindex @code{hword} directive
   5329 @cindex integers, 16-bit
   5330 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
   5331 @cindex sixteen bit integers
   5332 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
   5333 a 16 bit number for each.
   5334 
   5335 @ifset GENERIC
   5336 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
   5337 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
   5338 @end ifset
   5339 @ifclear GENERIC
   5340 @ifset W32
   5341 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
   5342 @end ifset
   5343 @ifset W16
   5344 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
   5345 @end ifset
   5346 @end ifclear
   5347 
   5348 @node Ident
   5349 @section @code{.ident}
   5350 
   5351 @cindex @code{ident} directive
   5352 
   5353 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
   5354 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
   5355 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
   5356 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
   5357 for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
   5358 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
   5359 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
   5360 
   5361 @node If
   5362 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
   5363 
   5364 @cindex conditional assembly
   5365 @cindex @code{if} directive
   5366 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
   5367 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
   5368 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
   5369 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
   5370 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
   5371 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
   5372 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
   5373 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
   5374 
   5375 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
   5376 @table @code
   5377 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
   5378 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
   5379 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
   5380 has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
   5381 is considered to be undefined.
   5382 
   5383 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
   5384 @item .ifb @var{text}
   5385 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
   5386 
   5387 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
   5388 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
   5389 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
   5390 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
   5391 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
   5392 end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
   5393 string comparison is case sensitive.
   5394 
   5395 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
   5396 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
   5397 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
   5398 
   5399 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
   5400 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
   5401 Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
   5402 
   5403 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
   5404 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
   5405 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
   5406 equal to zero.
   5407 
   5408 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
   5409 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
   5410 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
   5411 
   5412 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
   5413 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
   5414 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
   5415 to zero.
   5416 
   5417 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
   5418 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
   5419 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
   5420 
   5421 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
   5422 @item .ifnb @var{text}
   5423 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
   5424 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
   5425 
   5426 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
   5427 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
   5428 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
   5429 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
   5430 
   5431 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
   5432 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
   5433 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
   5434 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
   5435 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
   5436 has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
   5437 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
   5438 
   5439 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
   5440 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
   5441 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
   5442 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
   5443 
   5444 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
   5445 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
   5446 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
   5447 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
   5448 @end table
   5449 
   5450 @node Incbin
   5451 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
   5452 
   5453 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
   5454 @cindex binary files, including
   5455 The @code{incbin} directive can be used with @option{--allow-incbin}.
   5456 
   5457 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
   5458 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
   5459 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
   5460 around @var{file}.
   5461 
   5462 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
   5463 @var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
   5464 read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
   5465 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
   5466 after the @code{incbin} directive.
   5467 
   5468 @node Include
   5469 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
   5470 
   5471 @cindex @code{include} directive
   5472 @cindex supporting files, including
   5473 @cindex files, including
   5474 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
   5475 points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
   5476 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
   5477 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
   5478 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
   5479 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
   5480 around @var{file}.
   5481 
   5482 @node Int
   5483 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
   5484 
   5485 @cindex @code{int} directive
   5486 @cindex integers, 32-bit
   5487 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
   5488 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
   5489 expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
   5490 of target the assembly is for.
   5491 
   5492 @ifclear GENERIC
   5493 @ifset H8
   5494 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
   5495 integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
   5496 32-bit integers.
   5497 @end ifset
   5498 @end ifclear
   5499 
   5500 @ifset ELF
   5501 @node Internal
   5502 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
   5503 
   5504 @cindex @code{internal} directive
   5505 @cindex visibility
   5506 This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
   5507 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
   5508 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
   5509 
   5510 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
   5511 their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
   5512 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
   5513 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
   5514 processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
   5515 @end ifset
   5516 
   5517 @node Irp
   5518 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
   5519 
   5520 @cindex @code{irp} directive
   5521 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
   5522 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
   5523 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
   5524 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
   5525 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
   5526 @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
   5527 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
   5528 
   5529 For example, assembling
   5530 
   5531 @example
   5532         .irp    param,1,2,3
   5533         move    d\param,sp@@-
   5534         .endr
   5535 @end example
   5536 
   5537 is equivalent to assembling
   5538 
   5539 @example
   5540         move    d1,sp@@-
   5541         move    d2,sp@@-
   5542         move    d3,sp@@-
   5543 @end example
   5544 
   5545 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
   5546 
   5547 @node Irpc
   5548 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
   5549 
   5550 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
   5551 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
   5552 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
   5553 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
   5554 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
   5555 assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
   5556 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
   5557 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
   5558 
   5559 For example, assembling
   5560 
   5561 @example
   5562         .irpc    param,123
   5563         move    d\param,sp@@-
   5564         .endr
   5565 @end example
   5566 
   5567 is equivalent to assembling
   5568 
   5569 @example
   5570         move    d1,sp@@-
   5571         move    d2,sp@@-
   5572         move    d3,sp@@-
   5573 @end example
   5574 
   5575 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
   5576 at @xref{Macro}.
   5577 
   5578 @node Lcomm
   5579 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
   5580 
   5581 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
   5582 @cindex local common symbols
   5583 @cindex symbols, local common
   5584 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
   5585 denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
   5586 those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
   5587 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
   5588 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
   5589 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
   5590 
   5591 @ifset GENERIC
   5592 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
   5593 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
   5594 @end ifset
   5595 
   5596 @ifset HPPA
   5597 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
   5598 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
   5599 @end ifset
   5600 
   5601 @node Lflags
   5602 @section @code{.lflags}
   5603 
   5604 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
   5605 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
   5606 assemblers, but ignores it.
   5607 
   5608 @ifclear no-line-dir
   5609 @node Line
   5610 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
   5611 
   5612 @cindex @code{line} directive
   5613 @cindex logical line number
   5614 @ifset aout-bout
   5615 Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
   5616 expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
   5617 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
   5618 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
   5619 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
   5620 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
   5621 @end ifset
   5622 
   5623 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
   5624 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
   5625 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
   5626 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
   5627 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
   5628 
   5629 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
   5630 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
   5631 debugging.
   5632 @end ifclear
   5633 
   5634 @node Linkonce
   5635 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
   5636 @cindex COMDAT
   5637 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
   5638 @cindex common sections
   5639 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
   5640 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
   5641 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
   5642 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
   5643 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
   5644 unique.
   5645 
   5646 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
   5647 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
   5648 Executable format used on Windows NT.
   5649 
   5650 The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
   5651 following strings.  For example:
   5652 @smallexample
   5653 .linkonce same_size
   5654 @end smallexample
   5655 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
   5656 
   5657 @table @code
   5658 @item discard
   5659 Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
   5660 
   5661 @item one_only
   5662 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
   5663 
   5664 @item same_size
   5665 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
   5666 
   5667 @item same_contents
   5668 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
   5669 @end table
   5670 
   5671 @node List
   5672 @section @code{.list}
   5673 
   5674 @cindex @code{list} directive
   5675 @cindex listing control, turning on
   5676 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
   5677 not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
   5678 internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
   5679 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
   5680 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
   5681 
   5682 By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
   5683 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
   5684 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
   5685 
   5686 @node Ln
   5687 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
   5688 
   5689 @cindex @code{ln} directive
   5690 @ifclear no-line-dir
   5691 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
   5692 @end ifclear
   5693 @ifset no-line-dir
   5694 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
   5695 must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
   5696 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
   5697 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
   5698 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
   5699 @ifset BOUT
   5700 
   5701 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
   5702 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
   5703 output format.
   5704 @end ifset
   5705 @end ifset
   5706 
   5707 @node Loc
   5708 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
   5709 @cindex @code{loc} directive
   5710 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
   5711 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
   5712 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
   5713 instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
   5714 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
   5715 the row is added.
   5716 
   5717 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
   5718 
   5719 @table @code
   5720 @item basic_block
   5721 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
   5722 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
   5723 
   5724 @item prologue_end
   5725 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
   5726 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
   5727 
   5728 @item epilogue_begin
   5729 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
   5730 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
   5731 
   5732 @item is_stmt @var{value}
   5733 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
   5734 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
   5735 either 0 or 1.
   5736 
   5737 @item isa @var{value}
   5738 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
   5739 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
   5740 
   5741 @item discriminator @var{value}
   5742 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
   5743 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
   5744 
   5745 @end table
   5746 
   5747 @node Loc_mark_labels
   5748 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
   5749 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
   5750 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
   5751 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
   5752 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
   5753 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
   5754 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
   5755 this function respectively.
   5756 
   5757 @ifset ELF
   5758 @node Local
   5759 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
   5760 
   5761 @cindex @code{local} directive
   5762 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
   5763 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
   5764 will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
   5765 they will be created.
   5766 
   5767 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
   5768 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
   5769 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
   5770 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
   5771 @end ifset
   5772 
   5773 @node Long
   5774 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
   5775 
   5776 @cindex @code{long} directive
   5777 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
   5778 
   5779 @ignore
   5780 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
   5781 @c what it really ought to do
   5782 @node Lsym
   5783 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   5784 
   5785 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
   5786 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
   5787 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
   5788 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
   5789 rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
   5790 the same as the expression value:
   5791 @smallexample
   5792 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
   5793 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
   5794 @var{value} = @var{expression}
   5795 @end smallexample
   5796 @noindent
   5797 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
   5798 @end ignore
   5799 
   5800 @node Macro
   5801 @section @code{.macro}
   5802 
   5803 @cindex macros
   5804 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
   5805 generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
   5806 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
   5807 
   5808 @example
   5809         .macro  sum from=0, to=5
   5810         .long   \from
   5811         .if     \to-\from
   5812         sum     "(\from+1)",\to
   5813         .endif
   5814         .endm
   5815 @end example
   5816 
   5817 @noindent
   5818 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
   5819 
   5820 @example
   5821         .long   0
   5822         .long   1
   5823         .long   2
   5824         .long   3
   5825         .long   4
   5826         .long   5
   5827 @end example
   5828 
   5829 @ftable @code
   5830 @item .macro @var{macname}
   5831 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
   5832 @cindex @code{macro} directive
   5833 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
   5834 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
   5835 separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
   5836 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
   5837 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
   5838 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
   5839 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
   5840 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
   5841 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
   5842 definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
   5843 
   5844 @table @code
   5845 @item .macro comm
   5846 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
   5847 arguments.
   5848 
   5849 @item  .macro plus1 p, p1
   5850 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
   5851 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
   5852 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
   5853 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
   5854 
   5855 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
   5856 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
   5857 arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
   5858 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
   5859 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
   5860 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
   5861 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
   5862 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
   5863 
   5864 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
   5865 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
   5866 arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
   5867 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
   5868 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
   5869 
   5870 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
   5871 position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
   5872 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
   5873 
   5874 @end table
   5875 
   5876 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
   5877 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
   5878 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
   5879 characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
   5880 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
   5881 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
   5882 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
   5883 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
   5884 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
   5885 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
   5886 this macro definition:
   5887 
   5888 @example
   5889 	.macro label l
   5890 \l:
   5891 	.endm
   5892 @end example
   5893 
   5894 might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
   5895 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
   5896 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
   5897 identifier.
   5898 
   5899 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
   5900 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
   5901 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
   5902 length specifier like this:
   5903 
   5904 @example
   5905 	.macro opcode base length
   5906         \base.\length
   5907 	.endm
   5908 @end example
   5909 
   5910 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
   5911 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
   5912 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
   5913 
   5914 There are several possible ways around this problem:
   5915 
   5916 @table @code
   5917 @item Insert white space
   5918 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
   5919 solution.  eg:
   5920 
   5921 @example
   5922 	.macro label l
   5923 \l :
   5924 	.endm
   5925 @end example
   5926 
   5927 @item Use @samp{\()}
   5928 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
   5929 the following text.  eg:
   5930 
   5931 @example
   5932 	.macro opcode base length
   5933         \base\().\length
   5934 	.endm
   5935 @end example
   5936 
   5937 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
   5938 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
   5939 used as a separator.  eg:
   5940 
   5941 @example
   5942 	.altmacro
   5943 	.macro label l
   5944 l&:
   5945 	.endm
   5946 @end example
   5947 @end table
   5948 
   5949 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
   5950 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
   5951 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
   5952 
   5953 @item .endm
   5954 @cindex @code{endm} directive
   5955 Mark the end of a macro definition.
   5956 
   5957 @item .exitm
   5958 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
   5959 Exit early from the current macro definition.
   5960 
   5961 @cindex number of macros executed
   5962 @cindex macros, count executed
   5963 @item \@@
   5964 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
   5965 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
   5966 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
   5967 
   5968 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
   5969 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
   5970 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
   5971 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
   5972 @end ftable
   5973 
   5974 @node MRI
   5975 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
   5976 
   5977 @cindex @code{mri} directive
   5978 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
   5979 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
   5980 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
   5981 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
   5982 of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
   5983 
   5984 @node Noaltmacro
   5985 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
   5986 Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
   5987 
   5988 @node Nolist
   5989 @section @code{.nolist}
   5990 
   5991 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
   5992 @cindex listing control, turning off
   5993 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
   5994 not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
   5995 internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
   5996 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
   5997 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
   5998 
   5999 @node Octa
   6000 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
   6001 
   6002 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
   6003 @cindex @code{octa} directive
   6004 @cindex integer, 16-byte
   6005 @cindex sixteen byte integer
   6006 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
   6007 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
   6008 
   6009 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
   6010 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
   6011 
   6012 @node Offset
   6013 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
   6014 
   6015 @cindex @code{offset} directive
   6016 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section.  @var{loc} must
   6017 be an absolute expression.  This directive may be useful for defining
   6018 symbols with absolute values.  Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
   6019 directive.
   6020 
   6021 @node Org
   6022 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
   6023 
   6024 @cindex @code{org} directive
   6025 @cindex location counter, advancing
   6026 @cindex advancing location counter
   6027 @cindex current address, advancing
   6028 Advance the location counter of the current section to
   6029 @var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
   6030 expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
   6031 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
   6032 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
   6033 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
   6034 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
   6035 is the same as the current subsection.
   6036 
   6037 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
   6038 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
   6039 backwards.
   6040 
   6041 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
   6042 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
   6043 @c section. doc (a] cygnus.com 18feb91
   6044 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
   6045 may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
   6046 a chance to share your improved assembler.
   6047 
   6048 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
   6049 to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
   6050 people's assemblers.
   6051 
   6052 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
   6053 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
   6054 absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
   6055 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
   6056 
   6057 @node P2align
   6058 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
   6059 
   6060 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
   6061 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
   6062 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
   6063 storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
   6064 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
   6065 advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
   6066 counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
   6067 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
   6068 
   6069 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
   6070 padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
   6071 padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
   6072 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
   6073 with no-op instructions.
   6074 
   6075 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
   6076 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
   6077 directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
   6078 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
   6079 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
   6080 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
   6081 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
   6082 
   6083 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
   6084 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
   6085 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
   6086 @code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
   6087 pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
   6088 fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
   6089 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
   6090 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
   6091 the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
   6092 undefined.
   6093 
   6094 @ifset ELF
   6095 @node PopSection
   6096 @section @code{.popsection}
   6097 
   6098 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
   6099 @cindex Section Stack
   6100 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
   6101 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
   6102 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
   6103 (@pxref{Previous}).
   6104 
   6105 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
   6106 section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
   6107 stack.
   6108 @end ifset
   6109 
   6110 @ifset ELF
   6111 @node Previous
   6112 @section @code{.previous}
   6113 
   6114 @cindex @code{previous} directive
   6115 @cindex Section Stack
   6116 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
   6117 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
   6118 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
   6119 (@pxref{PopSection}).
   6120 
   6121 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
   6122 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
   6123 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
   6124 subsections).  For example:
   6125 
   6126 @smallexample
   6127 .section A
   6128  .subsection 1
   6129   .word 0x1234
   6130  .subsection 2
   6131   .word 0x5678
   6132 .previous
   6133  .word 0x9abc
   6134 @end smallexample
   6135 
   6136 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
   6137 section A.  Whilst:
   6138 
   6139 @smallexample
   6140 .section A
   6141 .subsection 1
   6142   # Now in section A subsection 1
   6143   .word 0x1234
   6144 .section B
   6145 .subsection 0
   6146   # Now in section B subsection 0
   6147   .word 0x5678
   6148 .subsection 1
   6149   # Now in section B subsection 1
   6150   .word 0x9abc
   6151 .previous
   6152   # Now in section B subsection 0
   6153   .word 0xdef0
   6154 @end smallexample
   6155 
   6156 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
   6157 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
   6158 
   6159 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
   6160 the top section on the section stack.
   6161 @end ifset
   6162 
   6163 @node Print
   6164 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
   6165 
   6166 @cindex @code{print} directive
   6167 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
   6168 assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
   6169 
   6170 @ifset ELF
   6171 @node Protected
   6172 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
   6173 
   6174 @cindex @code{protected} directive
   6175 @cindex visibility
   6176 This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
   6177 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
   6178 
   6179 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
   6180 their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
   6181 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
   6182 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
   6183 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
   6184 this.
   6185 @end ifset
   6186 
   6187 @node Psize
   6188 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
   6189 
   6190 @cindex @code{psize} directive
   6191 @cindex listing control: paper size
   6192 @cindex paper size, for listings
   6193 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
   6194 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
   6195 
   6196 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
   6197 of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
   6198 default width is 200 columns.
   6199 
   6200 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
   6201 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
   6202 @code{.eject}).
   6203 
   6204 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
   6205 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
   6206 
   6207 @node Purgem
   6208 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
   6209 
   6210 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
   6211 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
   6212 expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
   6213 
   6214 @ifset ELF
   6215 @node PushSection
   6216 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
   6217 
   6218 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
   6219 @cindex Section Stack
   6220 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
   6221 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
   6222 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
   6223 (@pxref{Previous}).
   6224 
   6225 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
   6226 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
   6227 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
   6228 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
   6229 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
   6230 @end ifset
   6231 
   6232 @node Quad
   6233 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
   6234 
   6235 @cindex @code{quad} directive
   6236 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
   6237 each bignum, it emits
   6238 @ifclear bignum-16
   6239 an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
   6240 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
   6241 @cindex eight-byte integer
   6242 @cindex integer, 8-byte
   6243 
   6244 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
   6245 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
   6246 @end ifclear
   6247 @ifset bignum-16
   6248 a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
   6249 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
   6250 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
   6251 @cindex integer, 16-byte
   6252 @end ifset
   6253 
   6254 @node Reloc
   6255 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
   6256 
   6257 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
   6258 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
   6259 @var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
   6260 the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
   6261 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
   6262 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
   6263 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
   6264 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
   6265 relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
   6266 section.
   6267 
   6268 @node Rept
   6269 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
   6270 
   6271 @cindex @code{rept} directive
   6272 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
   6273 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
   6274 
   6275 For example, assembling
   6276 
   6277 @example
   6278         .rept   3
   6279         .long   0
   6280         .endr
   6281 @end example
   6282 
   6283 is equivalent to assembling
   6284 
   6285 @example
   6286         .long   0
   6287         .long   0
   6288         .long   0
   6289 @end example
   6290 
   6291 @node Sbttl
   6292 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
   6293 
   6294 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
   6295 @cindex subtitles for listings
   6296 @cindex listing control: subtitle
   6297 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
   6298 title line) when generating assembly listings.
   6299 
   6300 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
   6301 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
   6302 
   6303 @ifset COFF
   6304 @node Scl
   6305 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
   6306 
   6307 @cindex @code{scl} directive
   6308 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
   6309 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
   6310 Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
   6311 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
   6312 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
   6313 symbolic debugging information.
   6314 @ifset BOUT
   6315 
   6316 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
   6317 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
   6318 accepts this directive but ignores it.
   6319 @end ifset
   6320 @end ifset
   6321 
   6322 @ifset COFF-ELF
   6323 @node Section
   6324 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
   6325 
   6326 @cindex named section
   6327 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
   6328 named @var{name}.
   6329 
   6330 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
   6331 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
   6332 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
   6333 
   6334 @ifset COFF
   6335 @ifset ELF
   6336 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
   6337 @subheading COFF Version
   6338 @end ifset
   6339 
   6340 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
   6341 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
   6342 ways:
   6343 
   6344 @smallexample
   6345 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
   6346 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
   6347 @end smallexample
   6348 
   6349 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
   6350 section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
   6351 
   6352 @table @code
   6353 @item b
   6354 bss section (uninitialized data)
   6355 @item n
   6356 section is not loaded
   6357 @item w
   6358 writable section
   6359 @item d
   6360 data section
   6361 @item e
   6362 exclude section from linking
   6363 @item r
   6364 read-only section
   6365 @item x
   6366 executable section
   6367 @item s
   6368 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
   6369 @item a
   6370 ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
   6371 @item y
   6372 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
   6373 @item 0-9
   6374 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
   6375 @end table
   6376 
   6377 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
   6378 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
   6379 loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
   6380 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
   6381 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
   6382 
   6383 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
   6384 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
   6385 @end ifset
   6386 
   6387 @ifset ELF
   6388 @ifset COFF
   6389 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
   6390 @subheading ELF Version
   6391 @end ifset
   6392 
   6393 @cindex Section Stack
   6394 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
   6395 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
   6396 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
   6397 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
   6398 
   6399 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
   6400 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
   6401 
   6402 @smallexample
   6403 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
   6404 @end smallexample
   6405 
   6406 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
   6407 @kindex --sectname-subst
   6408 @cindex section name substitution
   6409 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
   6410 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
   6411 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
   6412 
   6413 @smallexample
   6414 .macro exception_code
   6415 .section %S.exception
   6416 [exception code here]
   6417 .previous
   6418 .endm
   6419 
   6420 .text
   6421 [code]
   6422 exception_code
   6423 [...]
   6424 
   6425 .section .init
   6426 [init code]
   6427 exception_code
   6428 [...]
   6429 @end smallexample
   6430 
   6431 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
   6432 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
   6433 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
   6434 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
   6435 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
   6436 macros just for that purpose.
   6437 
   6438 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
   6439 combination of the following characters:
   6440 
   6441 @table @code
   6442 @item a
   6443 section is allocatable
   6444 @item e
   6445 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
   6446 @item w
   6447 section is writable
   6448 @item x
   6449 section is executable
   6450 @item M
   6451 section is mergeable
   6452 @item S
   6453 section contains zero terminated strings
   6454 @item G
   6455 section is a member of a section group
   6456 @item T
   6457 section is used for thread-local-storage
   6458 @item ?
   6459 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
   6460 @item @code{<number>}
   6461 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
   6462 field.  Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
   6463 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
   6464 resulting value.
   6465 @item @code{<target specific>}
   6466 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
   6467 @end table
   6468 
   6469 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed.  There are
   6470 a few exceptions to this rule however.  Processor and application specific
   6471 flags can be added to an already defined section.  The @code{.interp},
   6472 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
   6473 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
   6474 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
   6475 
   6476 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
   6477 
   6478 @table @code
   6479 @item @@progbits
   6480 section contains data
   6481 @item @@nobits
   6482 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
   6483 @item @@note
   6484 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
   6485 @item @@init_array
   6486 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
   6487 @item @@fini_array
   6488 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
   6489 @item @@preinit_array
   6490 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
   6491 @item @@@code{<number>}
   6492 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
   6493 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
   6494 some targets extend this list with their own types
   6495 @end table
   6496 
   6497 Many targets only support the first three section types.  The type may be
   6498 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
   6499 
   6500 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
   6501 ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
   6502 @code{%} character.
   6503 
   6504 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
   6505 special and have fixed types.  Any attempt to declare them with a different
   6506 type will generate an error from the assembler.
   6507 
   6508 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
   6509 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
   6510 
   6511 @smallexample
   6512 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
   6513 @end smallexample
   6514 
   6515 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
   6516 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
   6517 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
   6518 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
   6519 the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
   6520 absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
   6521 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
   6522 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
   6523 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
   6524 
   6525 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
   6526 be present along with an additional field like this:
   6527 
   6528 @smallexample
   6529 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
   6530 @end smallexample
   6531 
   6532 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
   6533 particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
   6534 
   6535 @table @code
   6536 @item comdat
   6537 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
   6538 @item .gnu.linkonce
   6539 an alias for comdat
   6540 @end table
   6541 
   6542 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
   6543 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
   6544 
   6545 @smallexample
   6546 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
   6547 @end smallexample
   6548 
   6549 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
   6550 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
   6551 present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
   6552 this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
   6553 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
   6554 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
   6555 
   6556 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
   6557 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
   6558 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
   6559 executable.  The section will contain data.
   6560 
   6561 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
   6562 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
   6563 
   6564 @smallexample
   6565 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
   6566 @end smallexample
   6567 
   6568 Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
   6569 separated flags:
   6570 
   6571 @table @code
   6572 @item #alloc
   6573 section is allocatable
   6574 @item #write
   6575 section is writable
   6576 @item #execinstr
   6577 section is executable
   6578 @item #exclude
   6579 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
   6580 @item #tls
   6581 section is used for thread local storage
   6582 @end table
   6583 
   6584 This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
   6585 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
   6586 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
   6587 work.
   6588 @end ifset
   6589 @end ifset
   6590 
   6591 @node Set
   6592 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
   6593 
   6594 @cindex @code{set} directive
   6595 @cindex symbol value, setting
   6596 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
   6597 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
   6598 @var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
   6599 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
   6600 
   6601 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
   6602 values given to the symbol are constants.  Values that are based on expressions
   6603 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
   6604 being done once per assembly.  This is because those targets do not set the
   6605 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
   6606 final link is performed.  This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
   6607 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
   6608 different symbols.
   6609 
   6610 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
   6611 file is the last value stored into it.
   6612 
   6613 @ifset Z80
   6614 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
   6615 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
   6616 @end ifset
   6617 
   6618 @node Short
   6619 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
   6620 
   6621 @cindex @code{short} directive
   6622 @ifset GENERIC
   6623 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
   6624 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
   6625 
   6626 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
   6627 numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
   6628 @end ifset
   6629 @ifclear GENERIC
   6630 @ifset W16
   6631 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
   6632 @end ifset
   6633 @ifset W32
   6634 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
   6635 a 16 bit number for each.
   6636 @end ifset
   6637 @end ifclear
   6638 
   6639 @node Single
   6640 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
   6641 
   6642 @cindex @code{single} directive
   6643 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
   6644 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
   6645 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
   6646 @ifset GENERIC
   6647 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
   6648 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
   6649 @end ifset
   6650 @ifclear GENERIC
   6651 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
   6652 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
   6653 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
   6654 @end ifset
   6655 @end ifclear
   6656 
   6657 @ifset COFF-ELF
   6658 @node Size
   6659 @section @code{.size}
   6660 
   6661 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
   6662 
   6663 @ifset COFF
   6664 @ifset ELF
   6665 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
   6666 @subheading COFF Version
   6667 @end ifset
   6668 
   6669 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
   6670 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
   6671 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
   6672 
   6673 @smallexample
   6674 .size @var{expression}
   6675 @end smallexample
   6676 
   6677 @ifset BOUT
   6678 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
   6679 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
   6680 ignores it.
   6681 @end ifset
   6682 @end ifset
   6683 
   6684 @ifset ELF
   6685 @ifset COFF
   6686 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
   6687 @subheading ELF Version
   6688 @end ifset
   6689 
   6690 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
   6691 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
   6692 
   6693 @smallexample
   6694 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
   6695 @end smallexample
   6696 
   6697 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
   6698 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
   6699 arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
   6700 symbols.
   6701 @end ifset
   6702 @end ifset
   6703 
   6704 @ifclear no-space-dir
   6705 @node Skip
   6706 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
   6707 
   6708 @cindex @code{skip} directive
   6709 @cindex filling memory
   6710 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
   6711 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
   6712 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
   6713 @samp{.space}.
   6714 @end ifclear
   6715 
   6716 @node Sleb128
   6717 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
   6718 
   6719 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
   6720 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
   6721 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
   6722 symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
   6723 
   6724 @ifclear no-space-dir
   6725 @node Space
   6726 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
   6727 
   6728 @cindex @code{space} directive
   6729 @cindex filling memory
   6730 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
   6731 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
   6732 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
   6733 as @samp{.skip}.
   6734 
   6735 @ifset HPPA
   6736 @quotation
   6737 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
   6738 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
   6739 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
   6740 @code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
   6741 for a summary.
   6742 @end quotation
   6743 @end ifset
   6744 @end ifclear
   6745 
   6746 @ifset have-stabs
   6747 @node Stab
   6748 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
   6749 
   6750 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
   6751 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
   6752 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
   6753 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
   6754 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
   6755 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
   6756 Up to five fields are required:
   6757 
   6758 @table @var
   6759 @item string
   6760 This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
   6761 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
   6762 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
   6763 using this field.
   6764 
   6765 @item type
   6766 An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
   6767 this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
   6768 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
   6769 
   6770 @item other
   6771 An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
   6772 low 8 bits of this expression.
   6773 
   6774 @item desc
   6775 An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
   6776 bits of this expression.
   6777 
   6778 @item value
   6779 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
   6780 @end table
   6781 
   6782 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
   6783 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
   6784 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
   6785 compatible with earlier assemblers!
   6786 
   6787 @table @code
   6788 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
   6789 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
   6790 
   6791 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
   6792 It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
   6793 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
   6794 strings.
   6795 
   6796 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
   6797 relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
   6798 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
   6799 assembled.
   6800 
   6801 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
   6802 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
   6803 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
   6804 
   6805 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
   6806 @item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
   6807 All five fields are specified.
   6808 @end table
   6809 @end ifset
   6810 @c end     have-stabs
   6811 
   6812 @node String
   6813 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
   6814 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
   6815 
   6816 @cindex string, copying to object file
   6817 @cindex string8, copying to object file
   6818 @cindex string16, copying to object file
   6819 @cindex string32, copying to object file
   6820 @cindex string64, copying to object file
   6821 @cindex @code{string} directive
   6822 @cindex @code{string8} directive
   6823 @cindex @code{string16} directive
   6824 @cindex @code{string32} directive
   6825 @cindex @code{string64} directive
   6826 
   6827 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
   6828 one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
   6829 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
   6830 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
   6831 
   6832 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
   6833 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
   6834 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
   6835 are stored in target endianness byte order.
   6836 
   6837 Example:
   6838 @smallexample
   6839 	.string32 "BYE"
   6840 expands to:
   6841 	.string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
   6842 	.string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
   6843 @end smallexample
   6844 
   6845 
   6846 @node Struct
   6847 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
   6848 
   6849 @cindex @code{struct} directive
   6850 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
   6851 which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
   6852 @smallexample
   6853         .struct 0
   6854 field1:
   6855         .struct field1 + 4
   6856 field2:
   6857         .struct field2 + 4
   6858 field3:
   6859 @end smallexample
   6860 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
   6861 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
   6862 value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
   6863 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
   6864 before further assembly.
   6865 
   6866 @ifset ELF
   6867 @node SubSection
   6868 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
   6869 
   6870 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
   6871 @cindex Section Stack
   6872 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
   6873 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
   6874 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
   6875 (@pxref{Previous}).
   6876 
   6877 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
   6878 section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
   6879 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
   6880 @end ifset
   6881 
   6882 @ifset ELF
   6883 @node Symver
   6884 @section @code{.symver}
   6885 @cindex @code{symver} directive
   6886 @cindex symbol versioning
   6887 @cindex versions of symbols
   6888 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
   6889 within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
   6890 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
   6891 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
   6892 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
   6893 shared library.
   6894 
   6895 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
   6896 @smallexample
   6897 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
   6898 @end smallexample
   6899 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
   6900 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
   6901 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
   6902 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
   6903 permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
   6904 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
   6905 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
   6906 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
   6907 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
   6908 function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
   6909 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
   6910 building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
   6911 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
   6912 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
   6913 
   6914 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
   6915 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
   6916 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
   6917 symbol table.
   6918 
   6919 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
   6920 @smallexample
   6921 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
   6922 @end smallexample
   6923 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
   6924 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
   6925 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
   6926 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
   6927 
   6928 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
   6929 @smallexample
   6930 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
   6931 @end smallexample
   6932 When @var{name} is not defined within the
   6933 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
   6934 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
   6935 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
   6936 @end ifset
   6937 
   6938 @ifset COFF
   6939 @node Tag
   6940 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
   6941 
   6942 @cindex COFF structure debugging
   6943 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
   6944 @cindex @code{tag} directive
   6945 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
   6946 information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
   6947 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
   6948 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
   6949 @ifset BOUT
   6950 
   6951 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
   6952 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
   6953 ignores it.
   6954 @end ifset
   6955 @end ifset
   6956 
   6957 @node Text
   6958 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
   6959 
   6960 @cindex @code{text} directive
   6961 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
   6962 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
   6963 expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
   6964 is used.
   6965 
   6966 @node Title
   6967 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
   6968 
   6969 @cindex @code{title} directive
   6970 @cindex listing control: title line
   6971 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
   6972 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
   6973 
   6974 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
   6975 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
   6976 
   6977 @ifset COFF-ELF
   6978 @node Type
   6979 @section @code{.type}
   6980 
   6981 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
   6982 
   6983 @ifset COFF
   6984 @ifset ELF
   6985 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
   6986 @subheading COFF Version
   6987 @end ifset
   6988 
   6989 @cindex COFF symbol type
   6990 @cindex symbol type, COFF
   6991 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
   6992 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
   6993 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
   6994 
   6995 @smallexample
   6996 .type @var{int}
   6997 @end smallexample
   6998 
   6999 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
   7000 entry.
   7001 
   7002 @ifset BOUT
   7003 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
   7004 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
   7005 directive but ignores it.
   7006 @end ifset
   7007 @end ifset
   7008 
   7009 @ifset ELF
   7010 @ifset COFF
   7011 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
   7012 @subheading ELF Version
   7013 @end ifset
   7014 
   7015 @cindex ELF symbol type
   7016 @cindex symbol type, ELF
   7017 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
   7018 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
   7019 
   7020 @smallexample
   7021 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
   7022 @end smallexample
   7023 
   7024 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
   7025 function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
   7026 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
   7027 compatibility with various other assemblers.
   7028 
   7029 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
   7030 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
   7031 below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
   7032 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
   7033 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
   7034 assemblers.
   7035 
   7036 The syntaxes supported are:
   7037 
   7038 @smallexample
   7039   .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
   7040   .type <name>,#<type>
   7041   .type <name>,@@<type>
   7042   .type <name>,%<type>
   7043   .type <name>,"<type>"
   7044 @end smallexample
   7045 
   7046 The types supported are:
   7047 
   7048 @table @gcctabopt
   7049 @item STT_FUNC
   7050 @itemx function
   7051 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
   7052 
   7053 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
   7054 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
   7055 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
   7056 processing.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
   7057 
   7058 @item STT_OBJECT
   7059 @itemx object
   7060 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
   7061 
   7062 @item STT_TLS
   7063 @itemx tls_object
   7064 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
   7065 
   7066 @item STT_COMMON
   7067 @itemx common
   7068 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
   7069 
   7070 @item STT_NOTYPE
   7071 @itemx notype
   7072 Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
   7073 
   7074 @item gnu_unique_object
   7075 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
   7076 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
   7077 name and type in use.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
   7078 systems).
   7079 
   7080 @end table
   7081 
   7082 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
   7083 
   7084 @end ifset
   7085 @end ifset
   7086 
   7087 @node Uleb128
   7088 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
   7089 
   7090 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
   7091 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
   7092 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
   7093 symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
   7094 
   7095 @ifset COFF
   7096 @node Val
   7097 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
   7098 
   7099 @cindex @code{val} directive
   7100 @cindex COFF value attribute
   7101 @cindex value attribute, COFF
   7102 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
   7103 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
   7104 entry.
   7105 @ifset BOUT
   7106 
   7107 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
   7108 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
   7109 @end ifset
   7110 @end ifset
   7111 
   7112 @ifset ELF
   7113 @node Version
   7114 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
   7115 
   7116 @cindex @code{version} directive
   7117 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
   7118 formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
   7119 @end ifset
   7120 
   7121 @ifset ELF
   7122 @node VTableEntry
   7123 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
   7124 
   7125 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
   7126 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
   7127 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
   7128 
   7129 @node VTableInherit
   7130 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
   7131 
   7132 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
   7133 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
   7134 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
   7135 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
   7136 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
   7137 @end ifset
   7138 
   7139 @node Warning
   7140 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
   7141 @cindex warning directive
   7142 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
   7143 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
   7144 
   7145 @node Weak
   7146 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
   7147 
   7148 @cindex @code{weak} directive
   7149 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
   7150 @code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
   7151 
   7152 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
   7153 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
   7154 @code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
   7155 
   7156 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
   7157 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
   7158 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
   7159 
   7160 @node Weakref
   7161 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
   7162 
   7163 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
   7164 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
   7165 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
   7166 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
   7167 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
   7168 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
   7169 
   7170 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
   7171 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
   7172 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
   7173 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
   7174 had the references to the alias removed.
   7175 
   7176 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
   7177 within the assembler.
   7178 
   7179 @node Word
   7180 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
   7181 
   7182 @cindex @code{word} directive
   7183 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
   7184 separated by commas.
   7185 @ifclear GENERIC
   7186 @ifset W32
   7187 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
   7188 @end ifset
   7189 @ifset W16
   7190 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
   7191 @end ifset
   7192 @end ifclear
   7193 @ifset GENERIC
   7194 
   7195 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
   7196 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
   7197 @end ifset
   7198 
   7199 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
   7200 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
   7201 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
   7202 @cindex difference tables altered
   7203 @cindex altered difference tables
   7204 @quotation
   7205 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
   7206 @end quotation
   7207 
   7208 @ifset GENERIC
   7209 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
   7210 addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
   7211 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
   7212 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
   7213 
   7214 @end ifset
   7215 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
   7216 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
   7217 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
   7218 compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
   7219 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
   7220 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
   7221 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
   7222 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
   7223 first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
   7224 of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
   7225 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
   7226 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
   7227 @code{sym2}.
   7228 
   7229 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
   7230 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
   7231 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
   7232 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
   7233 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
   7234 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
   7235 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
   7236 
   7237 @ifset INTERNALS
   7238 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
   7239 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
   7240 assembly language programmers.
   7241 @end ifset
   7242 @end ifset
   7243 @c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
   7244 
   7245 @ifclear no-space-dir
   7246 @node Zero
   7247 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
   7248 
   7249 @cindex @code{zero} directive
   7250 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
   7251 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes.  @var{size} must be an absolute
   7252 expression.  This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
   7253 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
   7254 instead of zero.  Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
   7255 @end ifclear
   7256 
   7257 @node Deprecated
   7258 @section Deprecated Directives
   7259 
   7260 @cindex deprecated directives
   7261 @cindex obsolescent directives
   7262 One day these directives won't work.
   7263 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
   7264 @table @t
   7265 @item .abort
   7266 @item .line
   7267 @end table
   7268 
   7269 @ifset ELF
   7270 @node Object Attributes
   7271 @chapter Object Attributes
   7272 @cindex object attributes
   7273 
   7274 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
   7275 into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
   7276 Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
   7277 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
   7278 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
   7279 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
   7280 hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
   7281 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
   7282 newer generation at run-time.
   7283 
   7284 This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
   7285 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
   7286 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
   7287 correctly.
   7288 
   7289 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
   7290 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
   7291 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
   7292 and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
   7293 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
   7294 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
   7295 
   7296 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
   7297 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
   7298 
   7299 @menu
   7300 * GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
   7301 * Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
   7302 @end menu
   7303 
   7304 @node GNU Object Attributes
   7305 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
   7306 
   7307 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
   7308 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
   7309 
   7310 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
   7311 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
   7312 an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
   7313 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
   7314 architecture-dependent ones.
   7315 
   7316 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
   7317 
   7318 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
   7319 
   7320 @table @r
   7321 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
   7322 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
   7323 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
   7324 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
   7325 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
   7326 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
   7327 @end table
   7328 
   7329 @subsection MIPS Attributes
   7330 
   7331 @table @r
   7332 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
   7333 The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
   7334 
   7335 @itemize @bullet
   7336 @item
   7337 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
   7338 @item
   7339 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
   7340 double-precision FPU.
   7341 @item
   7342 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
   7343 @item
   7344 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
   7345 @item
   7346 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
   7347 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
   7348 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
   7349 @item
   7350 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
   7351 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
   7352 general-purpose registers.
   7353 @item
   7354 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
   7355 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
   7356 @item
   7357 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
   7358 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
   7359 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
   7360 @end itemize
   7361 @end table
   7362 
   7363 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
   7364 
   7365 @table @r
   7366 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
   7367 The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
   7368 
   7369 @itemize @bullet
   7370 @item
   7371 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
   7372 @item
   7373 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
   7374 @item
   7375 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
   7376 @item
   7377 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
   7378 @end itemize
   7379 
   7380 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
   7381 The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
   7382 
   7383 @itemize @bullet
   7384 @item
   7385 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
   7386 @item
   7387 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
   7388 @item
   7389 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
   7390 @item
   7391 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
   7392 @end itemize
   7393 @end table
   7394 
   7395 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
   7396 
   7397 @table @r
   7398 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
   7399 The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
   7400 
   7401 @itemize @bullet
   7402 @item
   7403 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
   7404 @item
   7405 1 for files using software vector ABI.
   7406 @item
   7407 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
   7408 @end itemize
   7409 @end table
   7410 
   7411 @node Defining New Object Attributes
   7412 @section Defining New Object Attributes
   7413 
   7414 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
   7415 will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
   7416 mailing list.
   7417 
   7418 @itemize @bullet
   7419 @item
   7420 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
   7421 @item
   7422 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
   7423 @item
   7424 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
   7425 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
   7426 @item
   7427 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
   7428 @item
   7429 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
   7430 @item
   7431 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
   7432 @end itemize
   7433 
   7434 @end ifset
   7435 
   7436 @ifset GENERIC
   7437 @node Machine Dependencies
   7438 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
   7439 
   7440 @cindex machine dependencies
   7441 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
   7442 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
   7443 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
   7444 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
   7445 assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
   7446 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
   7447 optimization.
   7448 
   7449 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
   7450 include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
   7451 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
   7452 
   7453 @menu
   7454 @ifset AARCH64
   7455 * AArch64-Dependent::		AArch64 Dependent Features
   7456 @end ifset
   7457 @ifset ALPHA
   7458 * Alpha-Dependent::		Alpha Dependent Features
   7459 @end ifset
   7460 @ifset ARC
   7461 * ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
   7462 @end ifset
   7463 @ifset ARM
   7464 * ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
   7465 @end ifset
   7466 @ifset AVR
   7467 * AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
   7468 @end ifset
   7469 @ifset Blackfin
   7470 * Blackfin-Dependent::		Blackfin Dependent Features
   7471 @end ifset
   7472 @ifset CR16
   7473 * CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
   7474 @end ifset
   7475 @ifset CRIS
   7476 * CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
   7477 @end ifset
   7478 @ifset D10V
   7479 * D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
   7480 @end ifset
   7481 @ifset D30V
   7482 * D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
   7483 @end ifset
   7484 @ifset EPIPHANY
   7485 * Epiphany-Dependent::          EPIPHANY Dependent Features
   7486 @end ifset
   7487 @ifset H8/300
   7488 * H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
   7489 @end ifset
   7490 @ifset HPPA
   7491 * HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
   7492 @end ifset
   7493 @ifset I370
   7494 * ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
   7495 @end ifset
   7496 @ifset I80386
   7497 * i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
   7498 @end ifset
   7499 @ifset I860
   7500 * i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
   7501 @end ifset
   7502 @ifset I960
   7503 * i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
   7504 @end ifset
   7505 @ifset IA64
   7506 * IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
   7507 @end ifset
   7508 @ifset IP2K
   7509 * IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
   7510 @end ifset
   7511 @ifset LM32
   7512 * LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
   7513 @end ifset
   7514 @ifset M32C
   7515 * M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
   7516 @end ifset
   7517 @ifset M32R
   7518 * M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
   7519 @end ifset
   7520 @ifset M680X0
   7521 * M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
   7522 @end ifset
   7523 @ifset M68HC11
   7524 * M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
   7525 @end ifset
   7526 @ifset METAG
   7527 * Meta-Dependent ::             Meta Dependent Features
   7528 @end ifset
   7529 @ifset MICROBLAZE
   7530 * MicroBlaze-Dependent::	MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
   7531 @end ifset
   7532 @ifset MIPS
   7533 * MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
   7534 @end ifset
   7535 @ifset MMIX
   7536 * MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
   7537 @end ifset
   7538 @ifset MSP430
   7539 * MSP430-Dependent::		MSP430 Dependent Features
   7540 @end ifset
   7541 @ifset NDS32
   7542 * NDS32-Dependent::             Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
   7543 @end ifset
   7544 @ifset NIOSII
   7545 * NiosII-Dependent::            Altera Nios II Dependent Features
   7546 @end ifset
   7547 @ifset NS32K
   7548 * NS32K-Dependent::		NS32K Dependent Features
   7549 @end ifset
   7550 @ifset PDP11
   7551 * PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
   7552 @end ifset
   7553 @ifset PJ
   7554 * PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
   7555 @end ifset
   7556 @ifset PPC
   7557 * PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
   7558 @end ifset
   7559 @ifset RL78
   7560 * RL78-Dependent::              RL78 Dependent Features
   7561 @end ifset
   7562 @ifset RX
   7563 * RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
   7564 @end ifset
   7565 @ifset S390
   7566 * S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
   7567 @end ifset
   7568 @ifset SCORE
   7569 * SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
   7570 @end ifset
   7571 @ifset SH
   7572 * SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
   7573 * SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
   7574 @end ifset
   7575 @ifset SPARC
   7576 * Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
   7577 @end ifset
   7578 @ifset TIC54X
   7579 * TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
   7580 @end ifset
   7581 @ifset TIC6X
   7582 * TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
   7583 @end ifset
   7584 @ifset TILEGX
   7585 * TILE-Gx-Dependent ::          Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
   7586 @end ifset
   7587 @ifset TILEPRO
   7588 * TILEPro-Dependent ::          Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
   7589 @end ifset
   7590 @ifset V850
   7591 * V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
   7592 @end ifset
   7593 @ifset VAX
   7594 * Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
   7595 @end ifset
   7596 @ifset VISIUM
   7597 * Visium-Dependent::            Visium Dependent Features
   7598 @end ifset
   7599 @ifset XGATE
   7600 * XGATE-Dependent::             XGATE Features
   7601 @end ifset
   7602 @ifset XSTORMY16
   7603 * XSTORMY16-Dependent::         XStormy16 Dependent Features
   7604 @end ifset
   7605 @ifset XTENSA
   7606 * Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
   7607 @end ifset
   7608 @ifset Z80
   7609 * Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
   7610 @end ifset
   7611 @ifset Z8000
   7612 * Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
   7613 @end ifset
   7614 @end menu
   7615 
   7616 @lowersections
   7617 @end ifset
   7618 
   7619 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
   7620 @c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
   7621 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
   7622 @c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
   7623 @c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
   7624 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
   7625 @c in both conditional blocks.
   7626 
   7627 @ifset AARCH64
   7628 @include c-aarch64.texi
   7629 @end ifset
   7630 
   7631 @ifset ALPHA
   7632 @include c-alpha.texi
   7633 @end ifset
   7634 
   7635 @ifset ARC
   7636 @include c-arc.texi
   7637 @end ifset
   7638 
   7639 @ifset ARM
   7640 @include c-arm.texi
   7641 @end ifset
   7642 
   7643 @ifset AVR
   7644 @include c-avr.texi
   7645 @end ifset
   7646 
   7647 @ifset Blackfin
   7648 @include c-bfin.texi
   7649 @end ifset
   7650 
   7651 @ifset CR16
   7652 @include c-cr16.texi
   7653 @end ifset
   7654 
   7655 @ifset CRIS
   7656 @include c-cris.texi
   7657 @end ifset
   7658 
   7659 @ifset Renesas-all
   7660 @ifclear GENERIC
   7661 @node Machine Dependencies
   7662 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
   7663 
   7664 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
   7665 and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
   7666 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
   7667 family.
   7668 
   7669 @menu
   7670 * H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
   7671 * SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
   7672 @end menu
   7673 @lowersections
   7674 @end ifclear
   7675 @end ifset
   7676 
   7677 @ifset D10V
   7678 @include c-d10v.texi
   7679 @end ifset
   7680 
   7681 @ifset D30V
   7682 @include c-d30v.texi
   7683 @end ifset
   7684 
   7685 @ifset EPIPHANY
   7686 @include c-epiphany.texi
   7687 @end ifset
   7688 
   7689 @ifset H8/300
   7690 @include c-h8300.texi
   7691 @end ifset
   7692 
   7693 @ifset HPPA
   7694 @include c-hppa.texi
   7695 @end ifset
   7696 
   7697 @ifset I370
   7698 @include c-i370.texi
   7699 @end ifset
   7700 
   7701 @ifset I80386
   7702 @include c-i386.texi
   7703 @end ifset
   7704 
   7705 @ifset I860
   7706 @include c-i860.texi
   7707 @end ifset
   7708 
   7709 @ifset I960
   7710 @include c-i960.texi
   7711 @end ifset
   7712 
   7713 @ifset IA64
   7714 @include c-ia64.texi
   7715 @end ifset
   7716 
   7717 @ifset IP2K
   7718 @include c-ip2k.texi
   7719 @end ifset
   7720 
   7721 @ifset LM32
   7722 @include c-lm32.texi
   7723 @end ifset
   7724 
   7725 @ifset M32C
   7726 @include c-m32c.texi
   7727 @end ifset
   7728 
   7729 @ifset M32R
   7730 @include c-m32r.texi
   7731 @end ifset
   7732 
   7733 @ifset M680X0
   7734 @include c-m68k.texi
   7735 @end ifset
   7736 
   7737 @ifset M68HC11
   7738 @include c-m68hc11.texi
   7739 @end ifset
   7740 
   7741 @ifset METAG
   7742 @include c-metag.texi
   7743 @end ifset
   7744 
   7745 @ifset MICROBLAZE
   7746 @include c-microblaze.texi
   7747 @end ifset
   7748 
   7749 @ifset MIPS
   7750 @include c-mips.texi
   7751 @end ifset
   7752 
   7753 @ifset MMIX
   7754 @include c-mmix.texi
   7755 @end ifset
   7756 
   7757 @ifset MSP430
   7758 @include c-msp430.texi
   7759 @end ifset
   7760 
   7761 @ifset NDS32
   7762 @include c-nds32.texi
   7763 @end ifset
   7764 
   7765 @ifset NIOSII
   7766 @include c-nios2.texi
   7767 @end ifset
   7768 
   7769 @ifset NS32K
   7770 @include c-ns32k.texi
   7771 @end ifset
   7772 
   7773 @ifset PDP11
   7774 @include c-pdp11.texi
   7775 @end ifset
   7776 
   7777 @ifset PJ
   7778 @include c-pj.texi
   7779 @end ifset
   7780 
   7781 @ifset PPC
   7782 @include c-ppc.texi
   7783 @end ifset
   7784 
   7785 @ifset RL78
   7786 @include c-rl78.texi
   7787 @end ifset
   7788 
   7789 @ifset RX
   7790 @include c-rx.texi
   7791 @end ifset
   7792 
   7793 @ifset S390
   7794 @include c-s390.texi
   7795 @end ifset
   7796 
   7797 @ifset SCORE
   7798 @include c-score.texi
   7799 @end ifset
   7800 
   7801 @ifset SH
   7802 @include c-sh.texi
   7803 @include c-sh64.texi
   7804 @end ifset
   7805 
   7806 @ifset SPARC
   7807 @include c-sparc.texi
   7808 @end ifset
   7809 
   7810 @ifset TIC54X
   7811 @include c-tic54x.texi
   7812 @end ifset
   7813 
   7814 @ifset TIC6X
   7815 @include c-tic6x.texi
   7816 @end ifset
   7817 
   7818 @ifset TILEGX
   7819 @include c-tilegx.texi
   7820 @end ifset
   7821 
   7822 @ifset TILEPRO
   7823 @include c-tilepro.texi
   7824 @end ifset
   7825 
   7826 @ifset V850
   7827 @include c-v850.texi
   7828 @end ifset
   7829 
   7830 @ifset VAX
   7831 @include c-vax.texi
   7832 @end ifset
   7833 
   7834 @ifset VISIUM
   7835 @include c-visium.texi
   7836 @end ifset
   7837 
   7838 @ifset XGATE
   7839 @include c-xgate.texi
   7840 @end ifset
   7841 
   7842 @ifset XSTORMY16
   7843 @include c-xstormy16.texi
   7844 @end ifset
   7845 
   7846 @ifset XTENSA
   7847 @include c-xtensa.texi
   7848 @end ifset
   7849 
   7850 @ifset Z80
   7851 @include c-z80.texi
   7852 @end ifset
   7853 
   7854 @ifset Z8000
   7855 @include c-z8k.texi
   7856 @end ifset
   7857 
   7858 @ifset GENERIC
   7859 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
   7860 @raisesections
   7861 @end ifset
   7862 
   7863 @node Reporting Bugs
   7864 @chapter Reporting Bugs
   7865 @cindex bugs in assembler
   7866 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
   7867 
   7868 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
   7869 
   7870 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
   7871 not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
   7872 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
   7873 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
   7874 
   7875 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   7876 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   7877 
   7878 @menu
   7879 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   7880 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   7881 @end menu
   7882 
   7883 @node Bug Criteria
   7884 @section Have You Found a Bug?
   7885 @cindex bug criteria
   7886 
   7887 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
   7888 
   7889 @itemize @bullet
   7890 @cindex fatal signal
   7891 @cindex assembler crash
   7892 @cindex crash of assembler
   7893 @item
   7894 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
   7895 @command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
   7896 
   7897 @cindex error on valid input
   7898 @item
   7899 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   7900 
   7901 @cindex invalid input
   7902 @item
   7903 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   7904 is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
   7905 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
   7906 
   7907 @item
   7908 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
   7909 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
   7910 @end itemize
   7911 
   7912 @node Bug Reporting
   7913 @section How to Report Bugs
   7914 @cindex bug reports
   7915 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
   7916 
   7917 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
   7918 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
   7919 contact that organization first.
   7920 
   7921 You can find contact information for many support companies and
   7922 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
   7923 distribution.
   7924 
   7925 @ifset BUGURL
   7926 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
   7927 to @value{BUGURL}.
   7928 @end ifset
   7929 
   7930 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   7931 @strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
   7932 fact or leave it out, state it!
   7933 
   7934 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
   7935 and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
   7936 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
   7937 not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
   7938 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
   7939 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
   7940 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
   7941 give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   7942 and the most helpful.
   7943 
   7944 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
   7945 it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
   7946 that the bug has not been reported previously.
   7947 
   7948 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
   7949 bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   7950 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
   7951 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   7952 
   7953 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   7954 
   7955 @itemize @bullet
   7956 @item
   7957 The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
   7958 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
   7959 
   7960 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
   7961 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
   7962 
   7963 @item
   7964 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
   7965 
   7966 @item
   7967 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
   7968 version number.
   7969 
   7970 @item
   7971 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
   7972 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
   7973 
   7974 @item
   7975 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
   7976 observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
   7977 all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
   7978 
   7979 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
   7980 and then we might not encounter the bug.
   7981 
   7982 @item
   7983 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
   7984 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
   7985 high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
   7986 when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
   7987 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
   7988 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
   7989 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
   7990 
   7991 @item
   7992 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   7993 incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
   7994 
   7995 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
   7996 will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
   7997 notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
   7998 make a mistake.
   7999 
   8000 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
   8001 explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
   8002 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
   8003 library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
   8004 would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
   8005 would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
   8006 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
   8007 observations.
   8008 
   8009 @item
   8010 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
   8011 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
   8012 option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   8013 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
   8014 by line number.
   8015 
   8016 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
   8017 sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
   8018 @end itemize
   8019 
   8020 Here are some things that are not necessary:
   8021 
   8022 @itemize @bullet
   8023 @item
   8024 A description of the envelope of the bug.
   8025 
   8026 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   8027 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   8028 changes will not affect it.
   8029 
   8030 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
   8031 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
   8032 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
   8033 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   8034 
   8035 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
   8036 of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   8037 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   8038 less time, and so on.
   8039 
   8040 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
   8041 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
   8042 
   8043 @item
   8044 A patch for the bug.
   8045 
   8046 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
   8047 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
   8048 a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
   8049 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
   8050 
   8051 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
   8052 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
   8053 the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
   8054 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
   8055 
   8056 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
   8057 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
   8058 help us to understand.
   8059 
   8060 @item
   8061 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   8062 
   8063 Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
   8064 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   8065 @end itemize
   8066 
   8067 @node Acknowledgements
   8068 @chapter Acknowledgements
   8069 
   8070 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
   8071 it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
   8072 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
   8073 @c (October 2012),
   8074 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
   8075 
   8076 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
   8077 more details?}
   8078 
   8079 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
   8080 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
   8081 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
   8082 
   8083 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
   8084 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
   8085 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
   8086 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
   8087 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
   8088 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
   8089 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
   8090 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
   8091 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
   8092 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
   8093 
   8094 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
   8095 in format-specific I/O modules.
   8096 
   8097 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
   8098 has done much work with it since.
   8099 
   8100 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
   8101 
   8102 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
   8103 
   8104 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
   8105 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
   8106 
   8107 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
   8108 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
   8109 (which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
   8110 support a.out format.
   8111 
   8112 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
   8113 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
   8114 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
   8115 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
   8116 targets.
   8117 
   8118 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
   8119 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
   8120 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
   8121 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
   8122 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
   8123 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
   8124 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
   8125 
   8126 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
   8127 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
   8128 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
   8129 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
   8130 
   8131 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
   8132 
   8133 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
   8134 
   8135 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
   8136 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
   8137 formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
   8138 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
   8139 
   8140 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
   8141 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
   8142 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
   8143 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
   8144 and some initial 64-bit support).
   8145 
   8146 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
   8147 
   8148 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
   8149 support for openVMS/Alpha.
   8150 
   8151 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
   8152 flavors.
   8153 
   8154 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
   8155 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
   8156 
   8157 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
   8158 configuration enhancements.
   8159 
   8160 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
   8161 
   8162 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
   8163 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
   8164 want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
   8165 intentionally leaving anyone out.
   8166 
   8167 @node GNU Free Documentation License
   8168 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
   8169 @include fdl.texi
   8170 
   8171 @node AS Index
   8172 @unnumbered AS Index
   8173 
   8174 @printindex cp
   8175 
   8176 @bye
   8177 @c Local Variables:
   8178 @c fill-column: 79
   8179 @c End:
   8180